Accton Technology SMC2552WG2 EliteConnect 2.4GHz Wireless Access Point User Manual WA4101X 2 17

Accton Technology Corp EliteConnect 2.4GHz Wireless Access Point WA4101X 2 17

Users Manual

38 TeslaIrvine, CA 92618Phone: (949) 679-8000EliteConnect™ SMC2552W-G2 2.4GHz Wireless Access PointThe easy way to make all your network connectionsAugust 2006Revision Number: R02 F4.3.2.2
CopyrightInformation furnished by SMC Networks, Inc. (SMC) is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC. SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice.Copyright © 2006 bySMC Networks, Inc.38 TeslaIrvine, CA 92618All rights reserved.Trademarks:SMC is a registered trademark; and EliteConnect is a trademark of SMC Networks, Inc. Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
iCOMPLIANCESFederal Communication Commission Interference StatementThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for helpFCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.IMPORTANT NOTE:FCC Radiation Exposure StatementThis equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters (8 inches) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
COMPLIANCESiiIndustry Canada - Class BThis digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matérial brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 édictée par l’Industrie.Taiwan DGTJapan VCCI Class BAustralia/New Zealand AS/NZS 4771N11846
COMPLIANCESiiiEC Conformance Declaration Marking by the above symbol indicates compliance with the Essential Requirements of the R&TTE Directive of the European Union (1999/5/EC). This equipment meets the following conformance standards:• EN 60950-1 (IEC 60950-1) - Product Safety• EN 300 328 - Technical requirements for 2.4 GHz radio equipment• EN 301 489-1 / EN 301 489-17 - EMC requirements for radio equipmentCountries of Operation & Conditions of Use in the European CommunityThis device is intended to be operated in all countries of the European Community. Requirements for indoor vs. outdoor operation, license requirements and allowed channels of operation apply in some countries as described below:Note: The user must use the configuration utility provided with this product to ensure the channels of operation are in conformance with the spectrum usage rules for European Community countries as described below.• This device requires that the user or installer properly enter the current country of operation in the command line interface as described in the user guide, before operating this device.• This device will automatically limit the allowable channels determined by the current country of operation. Incorrectly entering the country of operation may result in illegal operation and may cause harmful interference to other systems. The user is obligated to ensure the device is operating according to the channel limitations, indoor/outdoor restrictions and license requirements for each European Community country as described in this document.• This device may be operated indoors or outdoors in all countries of the European Community using the 2.4 GHz band: Channels 1 - 13, except where noted below.- In Italy the end-user must apply for a license from the national spectrum authority to operate this device outdoors. - In Belgium outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2.46 - 2.4835 GHz band: Channel 13.- In France outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2.4 - 2.454 GHz band: Channels 1 - 7.  •  EN 50385
COMPLIANCESivDeclaration of Conformity in Languages of the EuropeanCommunityEnglish Hereby, SMC, declares that this Radio LAN device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.Finnish Valmistaja SMC vakuuttaa täten että Radio LAN device tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.Dutch Hierbij verklaart SMC dat het toestel Radio LAN device in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EGBij deze SMC dat deze Radio LAN device voldoet aan de essentiële eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.French Par la présente SMC déclare que l'appareil Radio LAN device est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CESwedish Härmed intygar SMC att denna Radio LAN device står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.Danish Undertegnede SMC erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio LAN device overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EFGerman Hiermit erklärt SMC, dass sich dieser/diese/dieses Radio LAN device in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet". (BMWi)Hiermit erklärt SMC die Übereinstimmung des Gerätes Radio LAN device mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien)Greek με την παρουσα SMC δηλωνει οτι radio LAN device συμμορφωνεται προσ τισ ουσιωδεισ απαιτησεισ και τισ λοιπεσ σΧετικεσ διαταξεισ τησ οδηγιασ 1999/5/εκItalian Con la presente SMC dichiara che questo Radio LAN device è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
COMPLIANCESvSafety CompliancePower Cord SafetyPlease read the following safety information carefully before installing the access point:WARNING: Installation and removal of the unit must be carried out by qualified personnel only.• The unit must be connected to an earthed (grounded) outlet to comply with international safety standards.• Do not connect the unit to an A.C. outlet (power supply) without an earth (ground) connection.• The appliance coupler (the connector to the unit and not the wall plug) must have a configuration for mating with an EN 60320/IEC 320 appliance inlet.• The socket outlet must be near to the unit and easily accessible. You can only remove power from the unit by disconnecting the power cord from the outlet.• This unit operates under SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) conditions according to IEC 60950. The conditions are only maintained if the equipment to which it is connected also operates under SELV conditions.• The PoE (Power over Ethernet), which is to be interconnected with other equipment that must be contained within the same building including the interconnected equipment’s associated LAN connections.France and Peru onlyThis unit cannot be powered from IT† supplies. If your supplies are of IT type, this unit must be powered by 230 V (2P+T) via an isolation transformer ratio 1:1, with the secondary connection point labelled Neutral, connected directly to earth (ground).† Impédance à la terreSpanish Por medio de la presente Manufacturer declara que el Radio LAN device cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CEPortuguese Manufacturer declara que este Radio LAN device está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
COMPLIANCESviImportant! Before making connections, make sure you have the correct cord set. Check it (read the label on the cable) against the following:Power Cord SetU.S.A. and Canada The cord set must be UL-approved and CSA certified.The minimum specifications for the flexible cord are:- No. 18 AWG - not longer than 2 meters, or 16 AWG.- Type SV or SJ- 3-conductorThe cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 AThe attachment plug must be an earth-grounding type with NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration.Denmark The supply plug must comply with Section 107-2-D1, Standard DK2-1a or DK2-5a.Switzerland The supply plug must comply with SEV/ASE 1011.U.K. The supply plug must comply with BS1363 (3-pin 13 A) and be fitted with a 5 A fuse which complies with BS1362.The mains cord must be <HAR> or <BASEC> marked and be of type HO3VVF3GO.75 (minimum).Europe The supply plug must comply with CEE7/7 (“SCHUKO”).The mains cord must be <HAR> or <BASEC> marked and be of type HO3VVF3GO.75 (minimum).IEC-320 receptacle.
COMPLIANCESviiVeuillez lire à fond l'information de la sécurité suivante avant d'installer le access point:AVERTISSEMENT: L’installation et la dépose de ce groupe doivent être confiés à un personnel qualifié.•  Ne branchez pas votre appareil sur une prise secteur (alimentation électrique) lorsqu'il n'y a pas de connexion de mise à la terre (mise à la masse).•  Vous devez raccorder ce groupe à une sortie mise à la terre (mise à la masse) afin de respecter les normes internationales de sécurité.•  Le coupleur d’appareil (le connecteur du groupe et non pas la prise murale) doit respecter une configuration qui permet un branchement sur une entrée d’appareil EN 60320/IEC 320.•  La prise secteur doit se trouver à proximité de l’appareil et son accès doit être facile. Vous ne pouvez mettre l’appareil hors circuit qu’en débranchant son cordon électrique au niveau de cette prise.•  L’appareil fonctionne à une tension extrêmement basse de sécurité qui est conforme à la norme IEC 60950. Ces conditions ne sont maintenues que si l’équipement auquel il est raccordé fonctionne dans les mêmes conditions.France et Pérou uniquement:Ce groupe ne peut pas être alimenté par un dispositif à impédance à la terre. Si vos alimentations sont du type impédance à la terre, ce groupe doit être alimenté par une tension de 230 V (2 P+T) par le biais d’un transformateur d’isolement à rapport 1:1, avec un point secondaire de connexion portant l’appellation Neutre et avec raccordement direct à la terre (masse).Cordon électrique - Il doit être agréé dans le pays d’utilisationEtats-Unis et Canada: Le cordon doit avoir reçu l’homologation des UL et un certificat de la CSA.Les spécifications minimales pour un cable flexible sont AWG No. 18, ou AWG No. 16 pour un cable de longueur inférieure à 2 mètres.- type SV ou SJ- 3 conducteursLe cordon doit être en mesure d’acheminer un courant nominal d’au moins 10 A.La prise femelle de branchement doit être du type à mise à la terre (mise à la masse) et respecter la configuration NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) ou NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V).Danemark: La prise mâle d’alimentation doit respecter la section 107-2 D1 de la norme DK2 1a ou DK2 5a.
COMPLIANCESviiiBitte unbedingt vor dem Einbauen des Access Point die folgenden Sicherheitsanweisungen durchlesen (Germany):WARNUNG: Die Installation und der Ausbau des Geräts darf nur durch Fachpersonal erfolgen.•  Das Gerät sollte nicht an eine ungeerdete Wechselstromsteckdose angeschlossen werden.•  Das Gerät muß an eine geerdete Steckdose angeschlossen werden, welche die internationalen Sicherheitsnormen erfüllt.•  Der Gerätestecker (der Anschluß an das Gerät, nicht der Wandsteckdosenstecker) muß einen gemäß EN 60320/IEC 320 konfigurierten Geräteeingang haben.•  Die Netzsteckdose muß in der Nähe des Geräts und leicht zugänglich sein. Die Stromversorgung des Geräts kann nur durch Herausziehen des Gerätenetzkabels aus der Netzsteckdose unterbrochen werden.•  Der Betrieb dieses Geräts erfolgt unter den SELV-Bedingungen (Sicherheitskleinstspannung) gemäß IEC 60950. Diese Bedingungen sind nur gegeben, wenn auch die an das Gerät angeschlossenen Geräte unter SELV-Bedingungen betrieben werden.•Suisse: La prise mâle d’alimentation doit respecter la norme SEV/ASE 1011.Europe La prise secteur doit être conforme aux normes CEE 7/7 (“SCHUKO”)LE cordon secteur doit porter la mention <HAR> ou <BASEC> et doit être de type HO3VVF3GO.75 (minimum).Cordon électrique - Il doit être agréé dans le pays d’utilisation
COMPLIANCESixStromkabel. Dies muss von dem Land, in dem es benutzt wird geprüft werden: U.S.A und Kanada Der Cord muß das UL gepruft und war das CSA beglaubigt.Das Minimum spezifikation fur der Cord sind:- Nu. 18 AWG - nicht mehr als 2 meter, oder 16 AWG.- Der typ SV oder SJ- 3-LeiterDer Cord muß haben eine strombelastbarkeit aus wenigstens 10 ADieser Stromstecker muß hat einer erdschluss mit der typ NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) oder NEMA 6-15P (15A, 250V) konfiguration.Danemark Dieser Stromstecker muß die ebene 107-2-D1, der standard DK2-1a oder DK2-5a Bestimmungen einhalten.Schweiz Dieser Stromstecker muß die SEV/ASE 1011Bestimmungen einhalten.Europe Das Netzkabel muß vom Typ HO3VVF3GO.75 (Mindestanforderung) sein und die Aufschrift <HAR> oder <BASEC> tragen.Der Netzstecker muß die Norm CEE 7/7 erfüllen (”SCHUKO”).
COMPLIANCESx
xiTable of ContentsChapter 1: Introduction  1-1Package Checklist  1-2Hardware Description  1-2Antennas 1-3LED Indicators  1-3Security Slot  1-4Console Port  1-4Ethernet Port  1-4Reset Button  1-5Power Connector  1-5Features and Benefits  1-5System Defaults  1-6Chapter 2: Hardware Installation  2-1Chapter 3: Network Configuration  3-1Network Topologies  3-2Ad Hoc Wireless LAN (no Access Point)  3-2Infrastructure Wireless LAN  3-3Infrastructure Wireless LAN for Roaming Wireless PCs  3-4Infrastructure Wireless Bridge  3-5Infrastructure Wireless Repeater  3-6Chapter 4: Initial Configuration  4-1Initial Setup through the CLI  4-1Required Connections  4-1Initial Configuration Steps  4-2Logging In  4-3Chapter 5: System Configuration  5-1Advanced Configuration  5-2System Identification  5-3TCP / IP Settings  5-5RADIUS 5-7SSH Settings  5-11
xiiContentsAuthentication 5-12Filter Control  5-17VLAN 5-19WDS Settings  5-21AP Management  5-27Administration 5-28System Log  5-32SNMP 5-36Configuring SNMP and Trap Message Parameters  5-37Configuring SNMPv3 Users  5-42Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters  5-44Configuring SNMPv3 Targets  5-46Radio Interface  5-48Security 5-64Status Information  5-83Access Point Status  5-83Station Status  5-86Event Logs  5-89Chapter 6: Command Line Interface  6-1Using the Command Line Interface  6-1Accessing the CLI  6-1Console Connection  6-1Telnet Connection  6-1Entering Commands  6-2Keywords and Arguments  6-2Minimum Abbreviation  6-3Command Completion  6-3Getting Help on Commands  6-3Partial Keyword Lookup  6-4Negating the Effect of Commands  6-4Using Command History  6-4Understanding Command Modes  6-4Exec Commands  6-5Configuration Commands  6-5Command Line Processing  6-6Command Groups  6-6General Commands  6-7configure 6-8end 6-8exit 6-8ping 6-9reset 6-10show history  6-10
xiiiContentsshow line  6-11System Management Commands  6-11country 6-12prompt 6-14system name  6-14username 6-15password 6-15ip ssh-server enable  6-16ip ssh-server port  6-16ip telnet-server enable  6-17ip http port  6-17ip http server  6-18ip https port  6-18ip https server  6-19web-redirect 6-20APmgmtIP 6-21APmgmtUI 6-22show apmagement  6-22show system  6-23show version  6-24show config  6-24show hardware  6-28System Logging Commands  6-28logging on  6-29logging host  6-29logging console  6-30logging level  6-30logging facility-type  6-31logging clear  6-32show logging  6-32show event-log  6-33System Clock Commands  6-33sntp-server ip  6-34sntp-server enable  6-34sntp-server date-time  6-35sntp-server daylight-saving  6-36sntp-server timezone  6-36show sntp  6-37DHCP Relay Commands  6-38dhcp-relay enable  6-38dhcp-relay 6-39show dhcp-relay  6-39SNMP Commands  6-40snmp-server community  6-41snmp-server contact  6-41
xivContentssnmp-server location  6-42snmp-server enable server  6-42snmp-server host   6-43snmp-server trap  6-44snmp-server engine-id  6-46snmp-server user  6-46snmp-server targets  6-48snmp-server filter  6-49snmp-server filter-assignments  6-50show snmp groups  6-50show snmp users  6-51show snmp group-assignments  6-51show snmp target  6-52show snmp filter  6-52show snmp filter-assignments  6-53show snmp  6-54Flash/File Commands  6-55bootfile 6-55copy   6-56delete 6-57dir 6-58show bootfile  6-58RADIUS Client  6-59radius-server address  6-59radius-server port  6-60radius-server key  6-60radius-server retransmit  6-61radius-server timeout  6-61radius-server port-accounting  6-62radius-server timeout-interim  6-62radius-server radius-mac-format  6-63radius-server vlan-format  6-63show radius  6-64802.1X Authentication  6-65802.1x 6-65802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rate  6-66802.1x session-key-refresh-rate  6-67802.1x session-timeout  6-67802.1x-supplicant enable  6-68802.1x-supplicant user  6-68show authentication  6-69MAC Address Authentication  6-70address filter default  6-70address filter entry  6-71address filter delete  6-71
xvContentsmac-authentication server  6-72mac-authentication session-timeout  6-72Filtering Commands  6-73filter local-bridge  6-73filter ap-manage  6-74filter uplink enable  6-74filter uplink  6-75filter ethernet-type enable  6-75filter ethernet-type protocol  6-76show filters  6-77WDS Bridge Commands  6-77bridge role (WDS)  6-78bridge-link parent  6-78bridge-link child  6-79bridge dynamic-entry age-time  6-80show bridge aging-time  6-80show bridge filter-entry  6-81show bridge link  6-81Spanning Tree Commands  6-83bridge stp enable  6-83bridge stp forwarding-delay  6-84bridge stp hello-time  6-84bridge stp max-age  6-85bridge stp priority  6-85bridge-link path-cost  6-86bridge-link port-priority  6-86show bridge stp  6-87Ethernet Interface Commands  6-88interface ethernet  6-88dns server  6-89ip address  6-89ip dhcp  6-90speed-duplex 6-91shutdown 6-92show interface ethernet  6-92Wireless Interface Commands  6-93interface wireless  6-95vap 6-95speed 6-96multicast-data-rate 6-96channel 6-97transmit-power 6-97radio-mode 6-98preamble 6-99antenna control  6-99
xviContentsantenna id  6-100antenna location  6-101beacon-interval 6-101dtim-period 6-102fragmentation-length 6-102rts-threshold 6-103super-g 6-104description 6-104ssid 6-105closed-system 6-105max-association 6-106assoc-timeout-interval 6-106auth-timeout-value 6-106shutdown 6-107show interface wireless  6-108show station  6-109Rogue AP Detection Commands  6-109rogue-ap enable  6-110rogue-ap authenticate  6-111rogue-ap duration  6-111rogue-ap interval  6-112rogue-ap scan  6-113show rogue-ap  6-113Wireless Security Commands  6-114auth 6-114encryption 6-116key 6-117transmit-key 6-118cipher-suite 6-119mic_mode 6-120wpa-pre-shared-key 6-121pmksa-lifetime 6-121pre-authentication 6-122Link Integrity Commands  6-123link-integrity ping-detect  6-124link-integrity ping-host  6-124link-integrity ping-interval  6-125link-integrity ping-fail-retry  6-125link-integrity ethernet-detect  6-125show link-integrity  6-126IAPP Commands  6-127iapp 6-127VLAN Commands  6-128vlan 6-128management-vlanid 6-129
xviiContentsvlan-id 6-129WMM Commands  6-130wmm 6-131wmm-acknowledge-policy 6-131wmmparam 6-132Appendix A: Troubleshooting  A-1Appendix B: Cables and Pinouts  B-1Twisted-Pair Cable Assignments  B-110/100BASE-TX Pin Assignments  B-1Straight-Through Wiring  B-2Crossover Wiring  B-3Console Port Pin Assignments  B-3Wiring Map for Serial Cable   B-4Appendix C: Specifications  C-1General Specifications  C-1Sensitivity C-3Transmit Power   C-3Operating Range  C-5GlossaryIndex
xviiiContents
1-1Chapter 1: IntroductionThe 2.4 GHz Wireless Access Point is an IEEE 802.11b/g access point that provides transparent, wireless high-speed data communications between the wired LAN and fixed or mobile devices equipped with an 802.11b, or 802.11g wireless adapter.This solution offers fast, reliable wireless connectivity with considerable cost savings over wired LANs (which include long-term maintenance overhead for cabling). Using 802.11b and 802.11g technology, this access point can easily replace a 10 Mbps Ethernet connection or seamlessly integrate into a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet LAN.The access point supports up to eight Virtual Access Points. This allows traffic to be separated for different user groups using an access point that services one area. For each VAP, different security settings, VLAN assignments, and other parameters can be applied.Each radio interface on the access point can operate in one of four modes:• Access Point – Providing conectivity to wireless clients in the service area.• Repeater – Providing an extended link to a remote access point from the wired LAN. In this mode, the access point does not have a cable connection to the wired Ethernet LAN.• Bridge – Providing links to access points operating in “Bridge” or “Root Bridge” mode and thereby connecting other wired LAN segments.• Root Bridge – Providing links to other access points operating in “Bridge” mode and thereby connecting other wired LAN segments. Only one unit in the wireless bridge network can be set to “Root Bridge” mode.In addition, the access point offers full network management capabilities through an easy to configure web interface, a command line interface for initial configuration and troubleshooting, and support for Simple Network Management Protocol tools.Radio Characteristics – The IEEE 802.11b/g standard uses a radio modulation technique known as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM), and a shared collision domain (CSMA/CA). It operates at the 2.4 GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) band for connections to 802.11g clients.IEEE 802.11g includes backward compatibility with the IEEE 802.11b standard. IEEE 802.11b also operates at 2.4 GHz, but uses Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Complementary Code Keying (CCK) modulation technology to achieve a communication rate of up to 11 Mbps. The access point supports a 54 Mbps half-duplex connection to Ethernet networks for each active channel.
Introduction1-21Package ChecklistThe 2.4 GHz Wireless Access Point package includes:•  One 2.4 GHz Wireless Access Point •  One Category 5 network cable•  One RS-232 console cable•  One AC power adapter and power cord•  Four rubber feet •  User Guide CDInform your dealer if there are any incorrect, missing or damaged parts. If possible, retain the carton, including the original packing materials. Use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it.Hardware DescriptionTop PanelLED IndicatorsAntennas
Hardware Description1-31Rear PanelAntennasThe access point includes integrated diversity antennas for wireless communications. A diversity antenna system uses two identical antennas to receive and transmit signals, helping to avoid multipath fading effects. When receiving, the access point checks both antennas and selects the one with the strongest signal. When transmitting, it will continue to use the antenna previously selected for receiving. The access point never transmits from both antennas at the same time.The antennas transmit the outgoing signal as a toroidal sphere (doughnut shaped), with the coverage extending most in a direction perpendicular to the antenna. The antenna should be adjusted to an angle that provides the appropriate coverage for the service area. For further information, see “Positioning the Antennas” on 2-2.LED IndicatorsThe access point includes three status LED indicators, as described in the following figure and table.Security SlotConsole PortReset Button5 VDC Power SocketRJ-45 PortPowerEthernetLink/Activity802.11b/g WirelessLink/Activity
Introduction1-41Security SlotThe access point includes a Kensington security slot on the rear panel. You can prevent unauthorized removal of the access point by wrapping the Kensington security cable (not provided) around an unmovable object, inserting the lock into the slot, and turning the key.Console PortThis port is used to connect a console device to the access point through a serial cable. This connection is described under “Console Port Pin Assignments” on page B-3. The console device can be a PC or workstation running a VT-100 terminal emulator, or a VT-100 terminal.Ethernet PortThe access point has one 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 port that can be attached directly to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX LAN segments. These segments must conform to the IEEE 802.3 or 802.3u specifications. This port supports automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, so you can use straight-through cables for all network connections to PCs, switches, or hubs.The access point appears as an Ethernet node and performs a bridging function by moving packets from the wired LAN to remote workstations on the wireless infrastructure.Note: The RJ-45 port also supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) based on the IEEE 802.3af standard. Refer to the description for the “Power Connector” for information on supplying power to the access point’s network port from a network device, such as a switch, that provides Power over Ethernet (PoE).LED Status DescriptionPWR On Indicates that the system is working normally.Flashing Indicates running a self-test or loading the software program.Flashing (Prolonged) Indicates system errors.Link On Indicates a valid 10/100 Mbps Ethernet cable link.Flashing Indicates that the access point is transmitting or receiving data on a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet LAN. Flashing rate is proportional to network activity.11g On Indicates that the 802.11b/g radio is enabled.Flashing Indicates that the access point is transmitting or receiving data through wireless links. Flashing rate is proportional to network activity.Off Indicates that the 802.11b/g radio is disabled.
Features and Benefits1-51Reset ButtonThis button is used to reset the access point or restore the factory default configuration. If you hold down the button for less than 5 seconds, the access point will perform a hardware reset. If you hold down the button for 5 seconds or more, any configuration changes you may have made are removed, and the factory default configuration is restored to the access point. Power ConnectorThe access point does not have a power switch. It is powered on when connected to the AC power adapter, and the power adapter is connected to a power source. The power adapter automatically adjusts to any voltage between 100-240 volts at 50 or 60 Hz. No voltage range settings are required.The access point may also receive Power over Ethernet (PoE) from a switch or other network device that supplies power over the network cable based on the IEEE 802.3af standard.Note that if the access point is connected to a PoE source device and also connected to a local power source through the AC power adapter, PoE will be disabled.Features and Benefits•  Local network connection via 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports or 54 Mbps wireless interface (supporting up to 128 mobile users)•  IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g compliant •  Interoperable with multiple vendors based on the IEEE 802.11f protocol•  Advanced security through 64/128/152-bit Wired Equivalent Protection (WEP) encryption, IEEE 802.1X authentication via a RADIUS server, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and MAC address filtering features to protect your sensitive data and authenticate only authorized users to your network•  Provides seamless roaming within the IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g WLAN environment•  Scans all available channels and selects the best channel for each client based on the signal-to-noise ratio•  Allows the country of operation to be set to match regulatory requirements (for countries outside of the United States)
Introduction1-61System DefaultsThe following table lists some of the access point’s basic system defaults. To reset the access point defaults, use the CLI command “reset configuration” from the Exec level prompt.Table 1-1.   System DefaultsFeature Parameter DefaultIdentification System Name SMCAdministration User Name adminPassword smcadminGeneral HTTP Server EnabledHTTP Server Port 80HTTPS Server EnabledHTTPS Server Port 443Web Redirect DisabledTCP/IP DHCP EnabledIP Address 192.168.2.2Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0Default Gateway 0.0.0.0Primary DNS IP 0.0.0.0Secondary DNS IP 0.0.0.0RADIUS (Primary and Secondary) IP Address 0.0.0.0Port 1812Key DEFAULTTimeout 5 secondsRetransmit attempts 3Accounting Port 0 (Disabled)Interim Update Timeout 3600 secondsSSH Server Status EnabledServer Port 22PPPoE PPPoE Status Disabled
System Defaults1-71MAC Authentication MAC DisabledAuthentication Session Timeout 0 minutes (disabled)Local MAC System Default AllowedLocal MAC Permission Allowed802.1X Authentication Status DisabledBroadcast Key Refresh 0 minutes (disabled)Session Key Refresh 0 minutes (disabled)Reauthentication Refresh Rate  0 seconds (disabled)Supplicant DisabledVLAN Management VLAN ID 1VLAN ID (VAP Interface) 1VLAN Tag Support DisabledQoS QoS Mode OffSVP (SpectraLink Voice Priority) DisabledFilter Control Local Bridge DisabledAP Management EnabledEthernet Type DisabledSNMP Status EnabledLocation nullContact nullCommunity (Read Only) PublicCommunity (Read/Write) PrivateTraps EnabledTrap Destination (1-4) DisabledTrap Destination IP Address  nullTrap Destination Community Name  PublicSNMP v3 Groups RORWAuthRWPrivSNMP v3 Users noneTable 1-1.   System DefaultsFeature Parameter Default
Introduction1-81System Logging Syslog DisabledLogging Host DisabledLogging Console DisabledIP Address / Host Name 0.0.0.0Logging Level InformationalLogging Facility Type 16System Clock SNTP Server Status EnabledSNTP Server 1 IP 137.92.140.80SNTP Server 2 IP 192.43.244.18Date and Time 00:00, Jan 1, 1970 (when there is no time server)Daylight Saving Time DisabledTime Zone GMT-5 (Eastern Time, US and Canada)Ethernet Interface Speed and Duplex AutoWireless Interface 802.11b/g IAPP EnabledSSID SMCRadio Mode b+gStatus DisabledAuto Channel Select EnabledClosed System DisabledTransmit Power FullMax Station Data Rate 54 MbpsMulticast Data Rate 5.5 MbpsPreamble Length LongBeacon Interval 100 TUsData Beacon Rate (DTIM Interval) 1 beaconRTS Threshold 2347 bytesAssociation Timeout Interval 30 minutesAuthentication Timeout Interval 60 minutesRogue AP Detection DisabledAntenna Control Method DiversityTable 1-1.   System DefaultsFeature Parameter Default
System Defaults1-91Wireless Interface 802.11b/g (contd.)Antenna ID 0x0000Antenna Location IndoorWireless Security 802.11b/g Authentication Type Open SystemData Encryption DisabledWEP Key Length 128 bitsWEP Key Type HexadecimalWEP Transmit Key Number 1WEP Keys nullWPA Configuration Mode WEP Only (Disabled)WPA Key Management WPA Pre-shared KeyWPA PSK Type AlphanumericMulticast Cipher WEPLink Integrity Status DisabledPing Interval 30 secondsFail Retry Count 6Table 1-1.   System DefaultsFeature Parameter Default
Introduction1-101
2-1Chapter 2: Hardware Installation1. Select a Site – Choose a proper place for the access point. In general, the best location is at the center of your wireless coverage area, within line of sight of all wireless devices. Try to place the access point in a position that can best cover its Basic Service Set (refer to “Infrastructure Wireless LAN” on page 3-3). For optimum performance, consider these points:• Mount the access point as high as possible above any obstructions in the coverage area.• Avoid mounting next to or near building support columns or other obstructions that may cause reduced signal or null zones in parts of the coverage area.• Mount away from any signal absorbing or reflecting structures (such as those containing metal).2. Mount the Access Point – The access point can be mounted on any horizontal surface.Mounting on a horizontal surface – To keep the access point from sliding on the surface, attach the four rubber feet provided in the accessory kit to the marked circles on the bottom of the access point.3. Lock the Access Point in Place – To prevent unauthorized removal of the access point, you can use a Kensington Slim MicroSaver security cable (not included) to attach the access point to a fixed object.
Hardware Installation2-224. Connect the Power Cord – Connect the power adapter to the access point, and the power cord to an AC power outlet. Otherwise, the access point can derive its operating power directly from the RJ-45 port when connected to a device that provides IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE). Note: If the access point is connected to both a PoE source device and an AC power source, AC power will be disabled.Caution: Use ONLY the power adapter supplied with this access point. Otherwise, the product may be damaged.5. Observe the Self Test – When you power on the access point, verify that the PWR indicator stops flashing and remains on, and that the other indicators start functioning as described under “LED Indicators” on page 1-3. If the PWR LED does not stop flashing, the self test has not completed correctly. Refer to “Troubleshooting” on page A-1.6. Connect the Ethernet Cable – The access point can be wired to a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet through a network device such as a hub or a switch. Connect your network to the RJ-45 port on the back panel with category 3, 4, or 5 UTP Ethernet cable. When the access point and the connected device are powered on, the Ethernet Link LED should light indicating a valid network connection. If this LED fails to turn on refer to “Troubleshooting” on page A-1.Note: The RJ-45 port on the access point supports auto=MDI/MDI-X operation, so you can use either straight-through or crossover cable to connect to switches or PCs.7. Position the Antennas – Each antenna emits a radiation pattern that is toroidal (doughnut shaped), with the coverage extending most in the direction perpendicular to the antenna. Therefore, the antennas should be oriented so that the radio coverage pattern fills the intended horizontal space. Also, the diversity antennas should both be positioned along the same axes, providing the same coverage area. For example, if the access point is mounted on a horizontal surface, both antennas should be positioned pointing vertically up to provide optimum coverage.8. Connect the Console Port – Connect the console cable (included) to the RS-232 console port for accessing the command-line interface. You can manage the access point using the console port (Chapter 6), the web interface (Chapter 5), or SNMP management software such as SMC’s EliteView.
3-1Chapter 3: Network Configuration Wireless networks support a stand-alone configuration as well as an integrated configuration with 10/100 Mbps Ethernet LANs. The 2.4 GHz Wireless Access Point also provides repeater and bridging services.Access points can be deployed to support wireless clients and connect wired LANs in the following configurations:• Ad hoc for departmental, SOHO or enterprise LANs• Infrastructure for wireless LANs• Infrastructure wireless LAN for roaming wireless PCs• Infrastructure wireless bridge to connect wired LANs• Infrastructure wireless repeater for extended rangeThe 802.11b and 802.11g frequency band which operates at 2.4 GHz can easily encounter interference from other 2.4 GHz devices, such as other  802.11b or g wireless devices, cordless phones and microwave ovens. If you experience poor wireless LAN performance, try the following measures: • Limit any possible sources of radio interference within the service area• Increase the distance between neighboring access points• Decrease the signal strength of neighboring access points• Increase the channel separation of neighboring access points (e.g. up to 5 channels of separation for 802.11b and 802.11g)
Network Configuration3-23Network TopologiesAd Hoc Wireless LAN (no Access Point)An ad hoc wireless LAN consists of a group of computers, each equipped with a wireless adapter, connected via radio signals as an independent wireless LAN. Computers in a specific ad hoc wireless LAN must therefore be configured to the same radio channel. An ad hoc wireless LAN can be used for a branch office or SOHO operation.Ad Hoc Wireless LANNotebook withWireless USB AdapterNotebook withWireless PC CardPC with WirelessPCI Adapter
Network Topologies3-33Infrastructure Wireless LANThe access point also provides access to a wired LAN for wireless workstations. An integrated wired/wireless LAN is called an Infrastructure configuration. A Basic Service Set (BSS) consists of a group of wireless PC users, and an access point that is directly connected to the wired LAN. Each wireless PC in this BSS can talk to any computer in its wireless group via a radio link, or access other computers or network resources in the wired LAN infrastructure via the access point.The infrastructure configuration not only extends the accessibility of wireless PCs to the wired LAN, but also increases the effective wireless transmission range for wireless PCs by passing their signal through one or more access points.A wireless infrastructure can be used for access to a central database, or for connection between mobile workers, as shown in the following figure.ServerSwitchDesktop PCAccess PointWired LAN Extensionto Wireless ClientsDesktop PCNotebook PC
Network Configuration3-43Infrastructure Wireless LAN for Roaming Wireless PCsThe Basic Service Set (BSS) defines the communications domain for each access point and its associated wireless clients. The BSS ID is a 48-bit binary number based on the access point’s wireless MAC address, and is set automatically and transparently as clients associate with the access point. The BSS ID is used in frames sent between the access point and its clients to identify traffic in the service area. The BSS ID is only set by the access point, never by its clients. The clients only need to set the Service Set Identifier (SSID) that identifies the service set provided by one or more access points. The SSID can be manually configured by the clients, can be detected in an access point’s beacon, or can be obtained by querying for the identity of the nearest access point. For clients that do not need to roam, set the SSID for the wireless card to that used by the access point to which you want to connect.A wireless infrastructure can also support roaming for mobile workers. More than one access point can be configured to create an Extended Service Set (ESS). By placing the access points so that a continuous coverage area is created, wireless users within this ESS can roam freely. All wireless network cards and adapters and  wireless access points within a specific ESS must be configured with the same SSID.<BSS 2><ESS><BSS 1>ServerSwitchDesktop PCAccess PointSeamless RoamingBetween Access PointsDesktop PCNotebook PCAccess PointNotebook PCSwitch
Network Topologies3-53Infrastructure Wireless BridgeThe IEEE 802.11 standard defines a WIreless Distribution System (WDS) for bridge connections between BSS areas (access points). The access point uses WDS to forward traffic on links between units. The access point supports WDS bridge links on the 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g) band and can be used with various external antennas to offer flexible deployment options.Up to six WDS bridge links can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network. One unit only must be configured as the “root bridge” in the wireless network. The root bridge should be the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN. Other bridges must configure one “parent” link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to the root bridge. The other five available WDS links can be specified as “child” links to other bridges. This forms a tiered-star topology for the wireless bridge network.When set to WDS bridging mode, only other units set to bridge mode can associate to the access point. The access point cannot support wireless clients and bridging at the same time.Wireless Bridge LinksBetween Access PointsRadioBridge LinkRadioBridge LinkRoot BridgeBridgeRadioBridge LinkBridgeBridgeNetworkCore
Network Configuration3-63Infrastructure Wireless RepeaterThe access point can also operate in a bridge “repeater” mode to extend the range of links to wireless clients. The access point uses WDS to forward traffic between the repeater bridge and the root bridge. The access point supports up to six WDS repeater links.In repeater mode, the access point does not support an Ethernet link to a wired LAN. Note that when the access point operates in this mode only half the normal throughput is possible. This is because the access point has to receive and then re-transmit all data on the same channel.Wireless Repeater LinksBetween Access Points802.11g RadioRepeater Link802.11g RadioRepeater Link802.11g RadioAP Link802.11g RadioAP LinkRoot BridgeRepeaterNetworkCoreRepeater
4-1Chapter 4: Initial ConfigurationThe  2.4 GHz Wireless Access Point offers a variety of management options, including a web-based interface, a direct connection to the console port, Telnet, Secure Shell (SSH), or using SNMP software.The initial configuration steps can be made through the web browser interface or CLI. The access point requests an IP address via DHCP by default. If no response is received from the DHCP server, then the access point uses the default address 192.168.2.2. If this address is not compatible with your network, you can first use the command line interface (CLI) as described below to configure a valid address. Note: Units sold in countries outside the United States are not configured with a specific country code. You must use the CLI to set the country code and enable wireless operation (page 4-3).Initial Setup through the CLIRequired ConnectionsThe access point provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuration. Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the access point. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown on page B-3.To connect to the console port, complete the following steps:1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB-9 connector.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the access point.3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:• Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or 2).• Set the data rate to 9600 baud.• Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.• Set flow control to none.• Set the emulation mode to VT100.• When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.4. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, press the [Enter] key to initiate the console connection. The console login screen will be displayed.
Initial Configuration4-24For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface” on page 6-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI, refer to “Command Groups” on page 6-6.Initial Configuration StepsLogging In – Enter “admin” for the user name, and “smcadmin” for the password. The CLI prompt appears displaying the access point’s name.Setting the IP Address – By default, the access point is configured to obtain IP address settings from a DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not available, the IP address defaults to 192.168.2.2, which may not be compatible with your network. You will therefore have to use the command line interface (CLI) to assign an IP address that is compatible with your network. Type “configure” to enter configuration mode, then type “interface ethernet” to access the Ethernet interface-configuration mode.Type “no ip dhcp” to disable DHCP client mode. Then type “ip address ip-address netmask gateway,” where “ip-address” is the access point’s IP address, “netmask” is the network mask for the network, and “gateway” is the default gateway router. Check with your system administrator to obtain an IP address that is compatible with your network.After configuring the access point’s IP parameters, you can access the management interface from anywhere within the attached network. The command line interface can also be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network. Username: adminPassword: smcadminEnterprise AP#Enterprise AP#configureEnterprise AP(config)#interface ethernetEnterprise AP(config-if)#Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#no ip dhcpEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.254Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Logging In4-34Setting the Country Code – Units sold in the United States are configured by default to use only radio channels 1-11 in 802.11b or 802.11g mode as defined by FCC regulations. Units sold in other countries are configured by default without a country code (i.e., 99). You must use the CLI to set the country code. Setting the country code restricts operation of the access point to the radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country. Type “exit” to leave configuration mode. Then type “country ?” to display the list of countries. Select the code for your country, and enter the country command again, following by your country code (e.g., tw for Taiwan).Note: The CLI examples shown later in this manual abbreviate the console prompt to just "AP." The console prompt can be configured using the "prompt" command (page 6-14).Logging InThere are only a few basic steps you need to complete to connect the access point to your corporate network, and provide network access to wireless clients. The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above). Enter the default IP address: http://192.168.2.2Logging In – Enter the username “admin,” and password “smcadmin” then click LOGIN. For information on configuring a user name and password, see page 5-28.Enterprise AP#country twEnterprise AP#
Initial Configuration4-44The home page displays the Main Menu.
5-1Chapter 5: System ConfigurationBefore continuing with advanced configuration, first complete the initial configuration steps described in Chapter 4 to set up an IP address for the access point.The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above). Enter the configured IP address of the access point, or use the default address: http://192.168.2.2To log into the access point, enter the default user name “admin” and the password “smcadmin”, then press “LOGIN”. When the home page displays, click on Advanced Setup. The following page will display.The information in this chapter is organized to reflect the structure of the web screens for easy reference. However, it is recommended that you configure a user name and password as the first step under “Administration” to control management access to this device (page 5-28).
System Configuration5-25Advanced ConfigurationThe Advanced Configuration pages include the following options.Table 5-2.   MenuMenu Description PageSystem Configures basic administrative and client access 5-3Identification Specifies the host name 5-3TCP / IP Settings  Configures the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and domain name servers 5-5RADIUS Configures the RADIUS server for wireless client authentication and accounting 5-7SSH Settings Configures Secure Shell management access 5-11Authentication Configures 802.1X client authentication, with an option for MAC address authentication  5-12Filter Control  Filters communications between wireless clients, access to the management interface from wireless clients, and traffic matching specific Ethernet protocol types5-17VLAN Enables VLAN support and sets the management VLAN ID 5-19WDS Settings Configures bridge or repeater modes for each radio interface and sets spanning tree parameters 5-21AP Management Configures access to management interfaces 5-27Administration Configures user name and password for management access; upgrades software from local file, FTP or TFTP server; resets configuration settings to factory defaults; and resets the access point5-28System Log Controls logging of error messages; sets the system clock via SNTP server or manual configuration 5-32SNMP Configures SNMP settings 5-36SNMP Controls access to this access point from management stations using SNMP, as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages 5-36SNMP Trap Filters Defines trap filters for SNMPv3 users 5-44SNMP Targets Specifies SNMPv3 users that will receive trap messages 5-46Radio Interface G Configures the IEEE 802.11g interface 5-48Radio Settings Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings for each VAP interface 5-48Security Enables each VAP interface, sets the SSID, and configures wireless security 5-63Status Displays information about the access point and wireless clients 5-82AP Status Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the wireless interface 5-82
Advanced Configuration5-35System IdentificationThe system name for the access point can be left at its default setting. However, modifying this parameter can help you to more easily distinguish different devices in your network.System Name – An alias for the access point, enabling the device to be uniquely identified on the network. (Default: Enterprise Wireless AP; Range: 1-32 characters) Station Station Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point 5-85Event Logs Shows log messages stored in memory 5-88Table 5-2.   MenuMenu Description Page
System Configuration5-45CLI Commands for System Identification – Enter the global configuration mode, and use the system name command to specify a new system name. Then return to the Exec mode, and use the show system command to display the changes to the system identification settings.Enterprise AP#configEnterprise AP(config)#system name R&D 6-14Enterprise AP(config)#end 6-88Enterprise AP#show system 6-23Enterprise AP#config 6-8Enter configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(config)#system name R&D 6-14Enterprise AP(config)#end 6-88Enterprise AP#show system 6-23System Information==============================================================Serial Number         :System Up time        : 0 days, 0 hours, 32 minutes, 22 secondsSystem Name           : R&DSystem Location       :System Contact        : ContactSystem Country Code   : US - UNITED STATESMAC Address           : 00-12-CF-12-34-60Radio A MAC Address   : 00-12-CF-12-34-61Radio G MAC Address   : 00-12-CF-12-34-65IP Address            : 192.168.2.2Subnet Mask           : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway       : 0.0.0.0VLAN State            : DISABLEDManagement VLAN ID(AP): 1IAPP State            : ENABLEDDHCP Client           : ENABLEDHTTP Server           : ENABLEDHTTP Server Port      : 80HTTPS Server          : ENABLEDHTTPS Server Port     : 443Slot Status           : Single band(b/g)Boot Rom Version      : v1.1.5Software Version      : v5.0.0.0SSH Server            : ENABLEDSSH Server Port       : 22Telnet Server         : ENABLEDWEB Redirect          : DISABLEDDHCP Relay            : DISABLED==============================================================Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-55TCP / IP SettingsConfiguring the access point with an IP address expands your ability to manage the access point. A number of access point features depend on IP addressing to operate.Note: You can use the web browser interface to access IP addressing only if the access point already has an IP address that is reachable through your network. By default, the access point will be automatically configured with IP settings from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. However, if you are not using a DHCP server to configure IP addressing, use the CLI to manually configure the initial IP values (see page 4-2). After you have network access to the access point, you can use the web browser interface to modify the initial IP configuration, if needed.Note: If there is no DHCP server on your network, or DHCP fails, the access point will automatically start up with a default IP address of 192.168.2.2.DHCP Client (Enable) – Select this option to obtain the IP settings for the access point from a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server. The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and Domain Name Server (DNS) address are dynamically assigned to the access point by the network DHCP server. (Default: Enabled)DHCP Client (Disable) – Select this option to manually configure a static address for the access point. • IP Address: The IP address of the access point. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
System Configuration5-65• Subnet Mask: The mask that identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.• Default Gateway: The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the access point, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local subnet. If you have management stations, DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers located on another subnet, type the IP address of the default gateway router in the text field provided. Otherwise, leave the address as all zeros (0.0.0.0).• Primary and Secondary DNS Address: The IP address of Domain Name Servers on the network. A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP addresses.  If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network, type the IP addresses in the text fields provided. Otherwise, leave the addresses as all zeros (0.0.0.0).CLI Commands for TCP/IP Settings – From the global configuration mode, enter the interface configuration mode with the interface ethernet command. Use the ip dhcp command to enable the DHCP client, or no ip dhcp to disable it. To manually configure an address, specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using the ip address command. To specify DNS server addresses use the dns server command. Then use the show interface ethernet command from the Exec mode to display the current IP settings.Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet 6-88Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#no ip dhcp 6-90Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 6-89Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns primary-server 192.168.1.55 6-89Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server 10.1.0.55 6-89Enterprise AP(config)#end 6-8Enterprise AP#show interface ethernet 6-92Ethernet Interface Information========================================IP Address          : 192.168.1.2Subnet Mask         : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway     : 192.168.1.253Primary DNS         : 192.168.1.55Secondary DNS       : 10.1.0.55Speed-duplex        : 100Base-TX Full DuplexAdmin status        : UpOperational status  : Up========================================Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-75RADIUSRemote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of user credentials for each user that requires access to the network.A primary RADIUS server must be specified for the access point to implement IEEE 802.1X network access control and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) wireless security. A secondary RADIUS server may also be specified as a backup should the primary server fail or become inaccessible.In addition, the configured RADIUS server can also act as a RADIUS Accounting server and receive user-session accounting information from the access point. RADIUS Accounting can be used to provide valuable information on user activity in the network.Note: This guide assumes that you have already configured RADIUS server(s) to support the access point. Configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software.
System Configuration5-85
Advanced Configuration5-95MAC Address Format – MAC addresses can be specified in one of four formats, using no delimeter, with a single dash delimeter, with multiple dash delimeters, and with multiple colon delimeters.VLAN ID Format – A VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network. VLAN IDs can be entered as hexadecimal numbers or as ASCII strings.Primary Radius Server Setup – Configure the following settings to use RADIUS authentication on the access point.• IP Address: Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server.• Port: The UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication messages. (Range: 1024-65535; Default: 1812)• Key: A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the access point and the RADIUS server. Be sure that the same text string is specified on the RADIUS server. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 255 characters)• Timeout: Number of seconds the access point waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before resending a request. (Range: 1-60 seconds; Default: 5)• Retransmit attempts: The number of times the access point tries to resend a request to the RADIUS server before authentication fails. (Range: 1-30; Default: 3)• Accounting Port: The RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting messages. (Range: 0 or 1024-65535; Default: 0, disabled)• Interim Update Timeout: The interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server. (Range: 60-86400; Default: 3600 seconds)Note: For the Timeout and Retransmit attempts fields, accept the default values unless you experience problems connecting to the RADIUS server over the network.Secondary Radius Server Setup – Configure a secondary RADIUS server to provide a backup in case the primary server fails. The access point uses the secondary server if the primary server fails or becomes inaccessible. Once the access point switches over to the secondary server, it periodically attempts to establish communication again with primary server. If communication with the primary server is re-established, the secondary server reverts to a backup role.
System Configuration5-105CLI Commands for RADIUS – From the global configuration mode, use the radius-server address command to specify the address of the primary or secondary RADIUS servers. (The following example configures the settings for the primary RADIUS server.) Configure the other parameters for the RADIUS server. Then use the show show radius command from the Exec mode to display the current settings for the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server address 192.168.1.25 6-59Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port 181 6-60Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server key green 6-60Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout 10 6-61Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server retransmit 5 6-61Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port-accounting 1813 6-62Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout-interim 500 6-62Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show radius 6-64Radius Server Information========================================IP                 : 192.168.1.25Port               : 181Key                : *****Retransmit         : 5Timeout            : 10Radius MAC format  : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================Radius Secondary Server Information========================================IP                 : 0.0.0.0Port               : 1812Key                : *****Retransmit         : 3Timeout            : 5Radius MAC format  : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-115SSH SettingsTelnet is a remote management tool that can be used to configure the access point from anywhere in the network. However, Telnet is not secure from hostile attacks. The Secure Shell (SSH) can act as a secure replacement for Telnet. The SSH protocol uses generated public keys to encrypt all data transfers passing between the access point and SSH-enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered. Clients can then securely use the local user name and password for access authentication.Note that SSH client software needs to be installed on the management station to access the access point for management via the SSH protocol.Notes: 1. The access point supports only SSH version 2.0.2. After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated.SSH Settings• Telnet Server Status: Enables or disables the Telnet server. (Default: Enabled)•SSH Server Status: Enables or disables the SSH server. (Default: Enabled)•SSH Server Port: Sets the UDP port for the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535;  Default: 22)
System Configuration5-125CLI Commands for SSH – To enable the SSH server, use the ip ssh-server enable command from the CLI Ethernet interface configuration mode. To set the SSH server UDP port, use the ip ssh-server port command. To view the current settings, use the show system command from the CLI Exec mode (not shown in the following example).AuthenticationWireless clients can be authenticated for network access by checking their MAC address against the local database configured on the access point, or by using a database configured on a central RADIUS server. Alternatively, authentication can be implemented using the IEEE 802.1X network access control protocol.A client’s MAC address provides relatively weak user authentication, since MAC addresses can be easily captured and used by another station to break into the network. Using 802.1X provides more robust user authentication using user names and passwords or digital certificates. You can configure the access point to use both MAC address and 802.1X authentication, with client station MAC authentication occurring prior to IEEE 802.1X authentication. However, it is better to choose one or the other, as appropriate.Take note of the following points before configuring MAC address or 802.1X authentication:• Use MAC address authentication for a small network with a limited number of users. MAC addresses can be manually configured on the access point itself without the need to set up a RADIUS server, but managing a large number of MAC addresses across many access points is very cumbersome. A RADIUS server can be used to centrally manage a larger database of user MAC addresses.• Use IEEE 802.1X authentication for networks with a larger number of users and where security is the most important issue. When using 802.1X authentication, a RADIUS server is required in the wired network to centrally manage the credentials of the wireless clients. It also provides a mechanism for enhanced network security using dynamic encryption key rotation or W-Fi Protected Access (WPA). Note: If you configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1X, RADIUS MAC address authentication is performed prior to 802.1X authentication. If RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds, then 802.1X authentication is performed. If RADIUS MAC authentication fails, 802.1X authentication is not performed.• The access point can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant mode. This enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured MD5 user name and password. This prevents rogue access points from gaining access to the network.Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#no ip telnet-server 6-17Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server enable 6-16Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server port 1124 6-16Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#exitEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#configure
Advanced Configuration5-135MAC Authentication – You can configure a list of the MAC addresses for wireless clients that are authorized to access the network. This provides a basic level of authentication for wireless clients attempting to gain access to the network. A database of authorized MAC addresses can be stored locally on the access point or remotely on a central RADIUS server. (Default: Disabled)• Disabled: No checks are performed on an associating station’s MAC address.• Local MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is compared against the local database stored on the access point. Use the Local MAC Authentication section of this web page to set up the local database, and configure all access points in the wireless network service area with the same MAC address database.• Radius MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is sent to a configured RADIUS server for authentication. When using a RADIUS authentication server for MAC address authentication, the server must first be configured in the Radius window (see “RADIUS” on page 5-7). The database of MAC addresses and filtering policy must be defined in the RADIUS server.Note: MAC addresses on the RADIUS server can be entered in four different formats (see “RADIUS” on page 5-7).
System Configuration5-145802.1X Supplicant – The access point can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant mode. This enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured MD5 user name and password. This prevents rogue access points from gaining access to the network. Local MAC Authentication – Configures the local MAC authentication database. The MAC database provides a mechanism to take certain actions based on a wireless client’s MAC address. The MAC list can be configured to allow or deny network access to specific clients.• System Default: Specifies a default action for all unknown MAC addresses (that is, those not listed in the local MAC database).• Deny: Blocks access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as “Allow.”• Allow: Permits access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as “Deny.”• MAC Authentication Settings: Enters specified MAC addresses and permissions into the local MAC database.• MAC Address: Physical address of a client. Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens; for example, 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.• Permission: Select Allow to permit access or Deny to block access. If Delete is selected, the specified MAC address entry is removed from the database.• Update: Enters the specified MAC address and permission setting into the local database.• MAC Authentication Table: Displays current entries in the local MAC database.
Advanced Configuration5-155CLI Commands for Local MAC Authentication – Use the mac-authentication server command from the global configuration mode to enable local MAC authentication. Use the mac-authentication session-timeout command to set the authentication interval. Set the default action for MAC addresses not in the local table using the address filter default command, then enter MAC addresses in the local table using the address filter entry command. To remove an entry from the table, use the address filter delete command. To display the current settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec mode.Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server local  6-72Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication session-timeout 5  6-72Enterprise AP(config)#address filter default denied    6-70Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry    00-70-50-cc-99-1a denied 6-71Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry    00-70-50-cc-99-1b allowedEnterprise AP(config)#address filter entry    00-70-50-cc-99-1c allowedEnterprise AP(config)#address filter delete    00-70-50-cc-99-1c 6-71Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show authentication 6-68Authentication Information===========================================================MAC Authentication Server      : LOCALMAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min802.1x supplicant              : DISABLED802.1x supplicant user         : EMPTY802.1x supplicant password     : EMPTYAddress Filtering              : DENIEDSystem Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.Filter TableMAC Address             Status-----------------       ----------00-70-50-cc-99-1a       DENIED00-70-50-cc-99-1b       ALLOWED=========================================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-165CLI Commands for RADIUS MAC Authentication – Use the mac-authentication server command from the global configuration mode to enable remote MAC authentication. Set the timeout value for re-authentication using the mac- authentication session-timeout command. Be sure to also configure connection settings for the RADIUS server (not shown in the following example). To display the current settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec  mode.CLI Command for 802.1x Supplicant – To configure the access point to operate as a 802.1X supplicant, first use the 802.1X supplicant user command to set a user name and password for the access point, then use the 802.1X supplicant command to enable the feature. To display the current settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec mode (not shown in the following example)Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server remote 6-72Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication    session-timeout 300 6-72Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show authentication 6-68Authentication Information===========================================================MAC Authentication Server      : REMOTEMAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 300 min802.1x supplicant              : DISABLED802.1x supplicant user         : EMPTY802.1x supplicant password     : EMPTYAddress Filtering              : DENIEDSystem Default : DENY addresses not found in filter table.Filter TableMAC Address             Status-----------------       ----------00-70-50-cc-99-1a       DENIED00-70-50-cc-99-1b       ALLOWED=========================================================Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP(config)#802.1X supplicant user SMC2555W dot1xpass 6-68Enterprise AP(config)#802.1X supplicant 6-68Enterprise AP(config)#
Advanced Configuration5-175Filter ControlThe access point can employ network traffic frame filtering to control access to network resources and increase security. You can prevent communications between wireless clients and prevent access point management from wireless clients. Also, you can block specific Ethernet traffic from being forwarded by the access point.Inter Client STAs Communication Filter – Sets the global mode for wireless-to-wireless communications between clients associated to Virtual AP (VAP) interfaces on the access point. (Default: Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client Communication)• Disabled: All clients can communicate with each other through the access point.• Prevent Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients associated with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other. Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces.• Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients cannot establish wireless communications with any other client, either those associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface.AP Management Filter – Controls management access to the access point from wireless clients. Management interfaces include the web, Telnet, or SNMP. (Default: Disabled)• Disabled: Allows management access from wireless clients.• Enabled: Blocks management access from wireless clients. Uplink Port MAC Address Filtering Status – Prevents traffic with specified source MAC addresses from being forwarded to wireless clients through the access point. You can add a maximum of eight MAC addresses to the filter table. (Default: Disabled)
System Configuration5-185• MAC Address: Specifies a MAC address to filter, in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.• Permission: Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table.Ethernet Type Filter – Controls checks on the Ethernet type of all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. (Default: Disabled)• Disabled: Access point does not filter Ethernet protocol types.• Enabled: Access point filters Ethernet protocol types based on the configuration of protocol types in the filter table. If the status of a protocol is set to “ON,” the protocol is filtered from the access point.Note: Ethernet protocol types not listed in the filtering table are always forwarded by the access point.CLI Commands for Bridge Filtering – Use the filter local-bridge command from the global configuration mode to prevent wireless-to-wireless communications through the access point. Use the filter ap-manage command to restrict management access from wireless clients. To configure Ethernet protocol filtering, use the filter ethernet-type enable command to enable filtering and the filter ethernet-type protocol command to define the protocols that you want to filter. To remove an entry from the table, use the address filter delete command. To display the current settings, use the show filters command from the Exec mode.Enterprise AP(config)#filter local-bridge 6-73Enterprise AP(config)#filter ap-manage 6-74Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink enable 6-74Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink add 00-12-34-56-78-9a 6-75Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type enable 7-74Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type protocol ARP 6-76Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show filters 6-77Protocol Filter Information=========================================================Local Bridge         :ENABLEDAP Management        :ENABLEDEthernet Type Filter :ENABLEDEnabled Protocol Filters---------------------------------------------------------Protocol: ARP                              ISO: 0x0806=========================================================Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-195VLANThe access point can employ VLAN tagging support to control access to network resources and increase security. VLANs separate traffic passing between the access point, associated clients, and the wired network. There can be a VLAN assigned to each associated client, a default VLAN for each VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface, and a management VLAN for the access point.Note the following points about the access point’s VLAN support:• The management VLAN is for managing the access point through remote management tools, such as the web interface, SSH, SNMP, or Telnet. The access point only accepts management traffic that is tagged with the specified management VLAN ID.• All wireless clients associated to the access point are assigned to a VLAN. If IEEE 802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients, specific VLAN IDs can be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. If a client is not assigned to a specific VLAN or if 802.1X is not used, the client is assigned to the default VLAN for the VAP interface with which it is associated. The access point only allows traffic tagged with assigned VLAN IDs or default VLAN IDs to access clients associated on each VAP interface.• When VLAN support is enabled on the access point, traffic passed to the wired network is tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID, either an assigned client VLAN ID, default VLAN ID, or the management VLAN ID. Traffic received from the wired network must also be tagged with one of these known VLAN IDs. Received traffic that has an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN tag is dropped.• When VLAN support is disabled, the access point does not tag traffic passed to the wired network and ignores the VLAN tags on any received frames.Note: Before enabling VLAN tagging on the access point, be sure to configure the attached network switch port to support tagged VLAN frames from the access point’s management VLAN ID, default VLAN IDs, and other client VLAN IDs. Otherwise, connectivity to the access point will be lost when you enable the VLAN feature.Using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move around a campus site. This feature can also be used to control access to network resources from clients, thereby improving security.A VLAN ID (1-4094) can be assigned to a client after successful IEEE 802.1X authentication. The client VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network. If a client does not have a configured VLAN ID on the RADIUS server, the access point assigns the client to the configured default VLAN ID for the VAP interface.Note: When using IEEE 802.1X to dynamically assign VLAN IDs, the access point must have 802.1X authentication enabled and a RADIUS server configured. Wireless clients must also support 802.1X client software.
System Configuration5-205When setting up VLAN IDs for each user on the RADIUS server, be sure to use the RADIUS attributes and values as indicated in the following table.VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server can be entered as hexadecimal digits or a string (see “radius-server vlan-format” on page 6-63).Note: The specific configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this guide. Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software.VLAN Classification – Enables or disables VLAN tagging support on the access point.Native VLAN ID – The VLAN ID that traffic must have to be able to manage the access point. (Range 1-4094; Default: 1)Number RADIUS Attribute Value64 Tunnel-Type VLAN (13)65 Tunnel-Medium-Type 80281 Tunnel-Private-Group-ID VLANID(1 to 4094 as hexadecimal or string)
Advanced Configuration5-215WDS SettingsEach access point radio interface can be configured to operate in a bridge or repeater mode, which allows it to forward traffic directly to other access point units. To set up bridge links between access point units, you must configure the wireless Distribution System (WDS) forwarding table by specifying the wireless MAC address of all units to which you want to forward traffic. Up to six WDS bridge or repeater links can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network.The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between bridges. This allows a wireless bridge to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.WDS Bridge – Up to six WDS bridge or repeater links (MAC addresses) can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network. One unit only must be configured as the “root bridge” in the wireless network. The root bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN. Other bridges need to specify one “Parent” link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to the root bridge. The other five WDS links are available as “Child” links to other bridges.•Bridge Role – Sets the radio to operate in one of the following four modes: (Default: AP)• AP (Access Point): Operates as an access point for wireless clients, providing connectivity to a wired LAN.
System Configuration5-225• Bridge: Operates as a bridge to other access points. The “Parent” link to the root bridge must be configured. Up to five other ”Child” links are available to other bridges.• Repeater: Operates as a wireless repeater, extending the range for remote wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge. The “Parent” link to the root bridge must be configured. In this mode, traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.• Root Bridge: Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network. Up to six ”Child” links are available to other bridges in the network.•Bridge Parent – The physical layer address of the root bridge unit or the bridge unit connected to the root bridge. (12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”)•Bridge Child – The physical layer address of other bridge units for which this unit serves as the bridge parent or the root bridge. Note that the first entry under the list of child nodes is reserved for the root bridge, and can only be configured if the  role is set to “Root Bridge.” (12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”)
Advanced Configuration5-235Spanning Tree Protocol – STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as
System Configuration5-245designated ports. After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology.•Bridge – Enables/disables STP on the wireless bridge or repeater. (Default: Disabled)•Bridge Priority – Used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority.)• Range: 0-65535• Default: 32768•Bridge Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network. (Range: 6-40 seconds)• Default: 20• Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].• Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]•Bridge Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message. (Range: 1-10 seconds)• Default: 2• Minimum: 1• Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]•Bridge Forwarding Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device waits before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. (Range: 4-30 seconds)• Default: 15• Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]• Maximum: 30
Advanced Configuration5-255•Link Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) • Range: 1-65535• Default: Ethernet interface: 19; Wireless interface: 40•Link Port Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.• Default: 128• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16CLI Commands for WDS Settings – To set the role of the access point radio interface, use the bridge role command from the CLI wireless interface configuration mode. If the role of the radio interface is set to “Bridge” or “Repeater,” the MAC address of the parent node must also be configured using the bridge-link parent command. If the role is set to anything other than “Access Point,” then you should also configure the MAC addresses of the child nodes using the bridge-link child command. To view the current bridge link settings, use the show bridge link command.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge role bridge 6-96Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 2    00-08-3e-84-bc-6d 6-98Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 3    00-08-3e-85-13-f2Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 4    00-08-3e-84-79-31Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link parent    00-08-2d-69-3a-51 6-97Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#exitEnterprise AP#show bridge link wireless g 6-101Interface Wireless G WDS Information====================================AP Role:   BridgeParent:    00-08-2d-69-3a-51Child:      Child 2:    00-08-3e-84-bc-6d      Child 3:    00-08-3e-85-13-f2      Child 4:    00-08-3e-84-79-31      Child 5:    00-00-00-00-00-00      Child 6:    00-00-00-00-00-00STAs:      No WDS Stations.Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-265CLI Commands for STP Settings – If the role of a radio interface is set to Repeater, Bridge or Root Bridge, STP can be enabled on the access point to maintain a valid network topology. To globally enable STP, use the bridge stp enable command from the CLI configuration mode. Then configure the other global STP parameters for the bridge. The path cost and priority for each bridge link can be set using the bridge-link path-cost and bridge-link port-priority command from the Wireless Interface configuration mode. The path cost and priority can also be set for the Ethernet port from the Ethernet Interface configuration mode. To view the current STP settings, use the show bridge stp command.Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp enable 6-104Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp forwarding-delay 2500 6-105Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp hello-time 500 6-106Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp max-age 4000 6-107Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp priority 40000 6-108Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless gEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link path-cost 2 40 6-109Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link port-priority 2 64 6-110Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#exitEnterprise AP#show bridge stp 6-111Bridge MAC           : 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9CStatus               : Disabledpriority             : 32768desiginated-root     : priority = 0, MAC = 00:00:00:00:00:00root-path-cost       : 0root-Port-no         : 0Hold Time            :     0 SecondsHello Time           :     0 SecondsMaximum Age          :     0 SecondsForward Delay        :     0 Secondsbridge Hello Time    :     2 Secondsbridge Maximum Age   :    20 Secondsbridge Forward Delay :     5 Secondstime-since-top-change:  3168 Secondstopology-change-count: 0Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-275AP ManagementThe Web, Telnet, and SNMP management interfaces are enabled and open to all IP addresses by default. To provide more security for management access to the access point, specific interfaces can be disabled and management restricted to a single IP address or a limited range of IP addresses.Once you specify an IP address or range of addresses, access to management interfaces is restricted to the specified addresses. If anyone tries to access a management interface from an unauthorized address, the access point will reject the connection.UI Management – Enables or disables management access through Telnet, the Web (HTTP), or SNMP interfaces. (Default: Enabled)Note: Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings.IP Management – Restricts management access to Telnet, Web, and SNMP interfaces to specified IP addresses. (Default: Any IP)• Any IP: Indicates that any IP address is allowed management access.• Single IP: Specifies a single IP address that is allowed management access.• Multiple IP: Specifies an address range as defined by the entered IP address and subnet mask. For example, IP address 192.168.1.6 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0, defines all IP addresses from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254.
System Configuration5-285CLI Commands for AP Management features.AdministrationChanging the PasswordManagement access to the web and CLI interface on the access point is controlled through a single user name and password. You can also gain additional access security by using control filters (see “Filter Control” on page 5-17). To protect access to the management interface, you need to configure an Administrator’s user name and password as soon as possible. If the user name and password are not configured, then anyone having access to the access point may be able to compromise access point and network security. Once a new Administrator has been configured, you can delete the default “admin” user name from the system.Note: Pressing the Reset button on the back of the access point for more than five seconds resets the user name and password to the factory defaults. For this reason, we recommend that you protect the access point from physical access by unauthorized persons.Username – The name of the user. The default name is “admin.” (Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)New Password – The password for management access. (Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive) Confirm New Password – Enter the password again for verification.CLI Commands for the Administrator’s User Name and Password – Use the username and password commands from the CLI configuration mode.Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.168.1.50 255.255.255.0  6-21Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtui SNMP enable 6-22Enterprise AP(config)#username bob 6-15Enterprise AP(config)#password admin 6-15Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-295Upgrading FirmwareYou can upgrade new access point software from a local file on the management workstation, or from an FTP or TFTP server. New software may be provided periodically from your distributor.After upgrading new software, you must reboot the access point to implement the new code. Until a reboot occurs, the access point will continue to run the software it was using before the upgrade started. Also note that new software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to the factory default settings when first activated after a reboot.
System Configuration5-305Before upgrading new software, verify that the access point is connected to the network and has been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask.If you need to download from an FTP or TFTP server, take the following additional steps:• Obtain the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server where the access point software is stored.• If upgrading from an FTP server, be sure that you have an account configured on the server with a user name and password.• If VLANs are configured on the access point, determine the VLAN ID with which the FTP or TFTP server is associated, and then configure the management station, or the network port to which it is attached, with the same VLAN ID. If you are managing the access point from a wireless client, the VLAN ID for the wireless client must be configured on a RADIUS server.Current version – Version number of runtime code.Firmware Upgrade Local – Downloads an operation code image file from the web management station to the access point using HTTP. Use the Browse button to locate the image file locally on the management station and click Start Upgrade to proceed.• New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)Firmware Upgrade Remote – Downloads an operation code image file from a specified remote FTP or TFTP server. After filling in the following fields, click Start Upgrade to proceed.• New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)• IP Address: IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server.• Username: The user ID used for login on an FTP server.• Password: The password used for login on an FTP server.Restore Factory Settings – Click the Restore button to reset the configuration settings for the access point to the factory defaults and reboot the system. Note that all user configured information will be lost. You will have to re-enter the default user name (admin) to re-gain management access to this device.Reboot Access Point – Click the Reset button to reboot the system. Note: If you have upgraded system software, then you must reboot the access point to implement the new operation code. New software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to default values when first activated after a reboot.
Advanced Configuration5-315CLI Commands for Downloading Software from a TFTP Server – Use the copy tftp file command from the Exec mode and then specify the file type, name, and IP address of the TFTP server. When the download is complete, the dir command can be used to check that the new file is present in the access point file system. To run the new software, use the reset board command to reboot the access point.Enterprise AP#copy tftp file 6-561. Application image2. Config file3. Boot block imageSelect the type of download<1,2,3>:  [1]:1TFTP Source file name:img.binTFTP Server IP:192.168.2.29Enterprise AP#dir 6-58File Name                     Type   File Size--------------------------    ----  -----------dflt-img.bin                    2     1319939img.bin                      2     1629577syscfg                          5       17776syscfg_bak                      5       17776      262144 byte(s) availableEnterprise AP#reset board 6-10Reboot system now? <y/n>: y
System Configuration5-325System Log The access point can be configured to send event and error messages to a System Log Server. The system clock can also be synchronized with a time server, so that all the messages sent to the Syslog server are stamped with the correct time and date.Enabling System LoggingThe access point supports a logging process that can control error messages saved to memory or sent to a Syslog server. The logged messages serve as a valuable tool for isolating access point and network problems.System Log Setup – Enables the logging of error messages. (Default: Disable)Server (1-4) – Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host. Up to four Syslog servers are supported on the access point. (Default: Disable)Server Name/IP – The IP address or name of a Syslog server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)UDP Port – The UDP port used by a Syslog server. (Range: 514 or 11024-65535; Default: 514)Logging Console – Enables the logging of error messages to the console. (Default: Disable)
Advanced Configuration5-335Logging Level – Sets the minimum severity level for event logging. (Default: Informational)The system allows you to limit the messages that are logged by specifying a minimum severity level. The following table lists the error message levels from the most severe (Emergency) to least severe (Debug). The message levels that are logged include the specified minimum level up to the Emergency level. Note: The access point error log can be viewed using the Event Logs window in the Status section (page 5-88). The Event Logs window displays the last 128 messages logged in chronological order, from the newest to the oldest. Log messages saved in the access point’s memory are erased when the device is rebooted.Logging Facility Type – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23; Default: 16)Error Level DescriptionEmergency System unusableAlerts Immediate action neededCritical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)Error  Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)Warning Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)Notice Normal but significant condition, such as cold start Informational Informational messages onlyDebug Debugging messages
System Configuration5-345CLI Commands for System Logging – To enable logging on the access point, use the logging on command from the global configuration mode. The logging level command sets the minimum level of message to log. Use the logging console command to enable logging to the console. Use the logging host command to specify up to four Syslog servers. The CLI also allows the logging facility-type command to set the facility-type number to use on the Syslog server. To view the current logging settings, use the show logging command.Configuring SNTPSimple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the access point to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the access point enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the access point will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.The access point acts as an SNTP client, periodically sending time synchronization requests to specific time servers. You can configure up to two time server IP addresses. The access point will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.SNTP Server – Configures the access point to operate as an SNTP client. When enabled, at least one time server IP address must be specified.• Primary Server: The IP address of an SNTP or NTP time server that the access point attempts to poll for a time update. • Secondary Server: The IP address of a secondary SNTP or NTP time server. The access point first attempts to update the time from the primary server; if this fails it attempts an update from the secondary server.Enterprise AP(config)#logging on 6-29Enterprise AP(config)#logging level alert 6-30Enterprise AP(config)#logging console 6-30Enterprise AP(config)#logging host 1 IP 10.1.0.3 514 6-29Enterprise AP(config)#logging host 1 Port 514 6-29Enterprise AP(config)#logging facility-type 19 6-31Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show logging 6-32Logging Information============================================Syslog State               : EnabledLogging Console State      : EnabledLogging Level              : AlertLogging Facility Type      : 19Servers   1: 10.1.0.3, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled   2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled=============================================Enterprise AP#
Advanced Configuration5-355Note: The access point also allows you to disable SNTP and set the system clock manually. Set Time Zone – SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours your time zone is located before (east) or after (west) UTC.Enable Daylight Saving – The access point provides a way to automatically adjust the system clock for Daylight Savings Time changes. To use this feature you must define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time. During this period the system clock is set back by one hour.CLI Commands for SNTP – To enable SNTP support on the access point, from the global configuration mode specify SNTP server IP addresses using the sntp-server ip command, then use the sntp-server enable command to enable the service. Use the sntp-server timezone command to set the time zone for your location, and the sntp-server daylight-saving command to set daylight savings. To view the current SNTP settings, use the show sntp command.Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server ip 1 10.1.0.19 6-34Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server enable 6-34Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server timezone +8 6-36Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server daylight-saving 6-36Enter Daylight saving from which month<1-12>: 3and which day<1-31>: 31Enter Daylight saving end to which month<1-12>: 10and which day<1-31>: 31Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show sntp 6-37SNTP Information=========================================================Service State        : EnabledSNTP (server 1) IP   : 10.1.10.19SNTP (server 2) IP   : 192.43.244.18Current Time         : 19 : 35, Oct 10th, 2003Time Zone            : +8 (TAIPEI, BEIJING)Daylight Saving      : Enabled, from Mar, 31st to Oct, 31st=========================================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-365CLI Commands for the System Clock – The following example shows how to manually set the system time when SNTP server support is disabled on the access point.SNMPSimple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network. Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems.Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network.The access point includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3 clients. This agent continuously monitors the status of the access point, as well as the traffic passing to and from wireless clients. A network management station can access this information using SNMP management software that is compliant with MIB II. To implement SNMP management, the access point must first have an IP address and subnet mask, configured either manually or dynamically. Access to the onboard agent using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To communicate with the access point, the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication.Access to the access point using SNMP v3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling notifications that are sent to specified user targets.Enterprise AP(config)#no sntp-server enable 6-34Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server date-time 6-35Enter Year<1970-2100>: 2003Enter Month<1-12>: 10Enter Day<1-31>: 10Enter Hour<0-23>: 18Enter Min<0-59>: 35Enterprise AP(config)#
SNMP5-375Configuring SNMP and Trap Message ParametersThe access point  SNMP agent must be enabled to function (for versions 1, 2c, and 3 clients). Management access using SNMP v1 and v2c also requires community strings to be configured for authentication. Trap notifications can be enabled and sent to up to four management stations.SNMP – Enables or disables SNMP management access and also enables the access point to send SNMP traps (notifications). (Default: Disable)Location – A text string that describes the system location. (Maximum length: 255 characters)Contact – A text string that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255 characters)Community Name (Read Only) – Defines the SNMP community access string that has read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public)
System Configuration5-385Community Name (Read/Write) – Defines the SNMP community access string that has read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: private)Trap Destination (1 to 4) – Enables recipients (up to four) of SNMP notifications. •Trap Destination IP Address – Specifies the recipient of SNMP notifications. Enter the IP address or the host name. (Host Name: 1 to 63 characters, case sensitive)•Trap Destination Community Name – The community string sent with the notification operation. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public)Engine ID – Sets the engine identifier for the SNMPv3 agent that resides on the access point. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets. A default engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the access point. (Range: 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters)Note: If the local engine ID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. All existing users will need to be re-configured. If you want to change the default engine ID, change it first before configuring other SNMP v3 parameters.
SNMP5-395Trap Configuration – Allows selection of specific SNMP notifications to send. The following items are available:• sysSystemUp - The access point is up and running.• sysSystemDown - The access point is about to shutdown and reboot.• sysRadiusServerChanged - The access point has changed from the primary RADIUS server to the secondary, or from the secondary to the primary.• sysConfigFileVersionChanged - The access point’s configuration file has been changed.• dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated with the access point.• dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully re-associated with the access point.• dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully authenticated.• dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association, re-association, or authentication.• dot11InterfaceBFail - The 802.11b interface has failed.• dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the RADIUS server.• dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address authentication with the RADIUS server.• dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X authentication.• dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server.• dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication.• dot1xSuppAuthenticated - A supplicant station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server• localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the local database on the access point.• localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with the local MAC address database on the access point.• iappStationRoamedFrom - A client station has roamed from another access point (identified by its IP address).• iappStationRoamedTo - A client station has roamed to another access point (identified by its IP address).• iappContextDataSent - A client station’s Context Data has been sent to another access point with which the station has associated.• sntpServerFail - The access point has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP server.• wirelessExternalAntenna - An external antenna has been enabled.• dot11WirelessStationDeauthenticate - A client station has de-authenticated from the network.• dot11StationDisassociate - A client station no longer associates with the network.
System Configuration5-405• dot11StationAuthenticateFail - A client station has tried and failed to authenticate to the network.•Enable All Traps - Click the button to enable all the available traps.•Disable All Traps - Click the button to disable all the available traps.CLI Commands for SNMP and Trap Configuration – Use the snmp-server enable server command from the global configuration mode to enable the SNMP agent. Use the snmp-server location and snmp-server contact commands to indicate the physical location of the access point and define a system contact. To set the read-only and read/write community names, use the snmp-server community command. Use the snmp-server host command to define a trap receiver host and the snmp-server trap command to enable or disable specific traps.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server enable server 6-42Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw 6-41Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server community beta roEnterprise AP(config)#snmp-server location WC-19 6-42Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server contact Paul 6-41Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.9 alpha 6-43Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server trap dot11StationAssociation 6-44Enterprise AP(config)#
SNMP5-415To view the current SNMP settings, use the show snmp command.Enterprise AP#show snmp 6-54SNMP Information==============================================Service State                 : EnableCommunity (ro)                : *****Community (rw)                : *****Location                      : WC-19Contact                       : PaulEngineId   :80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:2e:62:00:00:00:18EngineBoots:1Trap Destinations:   1:      192.168.1.9, Community: *****, State: Enabled   2:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   3:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   4:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled     dot11InterfaceAGFail  Enabled        dot11InterfaceBFail    Enabled  dot11StationAssociation  Enabled dot11StationAuthentication    Enableddot11StationReAssociation  Enabled    dot11StationRequestFail    Enabled            dot1xAuthFail  Enabled      dot1xAuthNotInitiated    Enabled         dot1xAuthSuccess  Enabled       dot1xMacAddrAuthFail    Enabled  dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess  Enabled        iappContextDataSent    Enabled    iappStationRoamedFrom  Enabled        iappStationRoamedTo    Enabled     localMacAddrAuthFail  Enabled    localMacAddrAuthSuccess    Enabled iappContextDataSent       Enabled       dot1XSuppAuthenticated  Enabled   wirelessExternalAntenna Enabled          dot11InterfaceAFail  Enabled       dot11InterfaceGFail Enabled             pppLogonFail  Enabled             sntpServerFail    Enabled configFileVersionChanged  Enabled        radiusServerChanged    Enabled               systemDown  Enabled                   systemUp    Enabled=============================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-425Configuring SNMPv3 UsersThe access point allows up to 10 SNMP v3 users to be configured. Each user must be defined by a unique name, assigned to one of three pre-defined security groups, and configured with specific authentication and encryption settings.User – The SNMPv3 user name. (32 characters maximum)Group – The SNMPv3 group name. (Options: RO, RWAuth, or RWPriv; Default: RO)• RO – Read-only access.• RWAuth – Read/write access with user authentication.• RWPriv – Read/write access with both user authentication and data encryption.Auth Type – The authentication type used for the SNMP user; either MD5 or none. When MD5 is selected, enter a password in the corresponding Passphrase field.Priv Type – The data encryption type used for the SNMP user; either DES or none. When DES is selected, enter a key in the corresponding Passphrase field.Passphrase – The password or key associated with the authentication and privacy settings. A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.Action – Click the Add button to add a new user to the list. Click the edit button to change details of an existing user. Click the Del button to remove a user from the list.Note: Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. For example, a user who has “Auth Type” and “Priv Type” configured to MD5 and DES respectively (that it, uses both authentication and data encryption) must be assigned to the RWPriv group. If this same user were instead assigned to the read-only (RO) group, the user would not be able to access the database.
SNMP5-435CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Users – Use the snmp-server engine-id command to define the SNMP v3 engine before assigning users to groups. Use the snmp-server user command to assign users to one of the three groups and set the appropriate authentication and encryption types to be used. To view the current SNMP v3 engine ID, use the show snmp command. To view SNMP users and group settings, use the show snmp users or show snmp group-assignments commands.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server engine-id 1a:2b:3c:4d:00:ff 6-46Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server user 6-46User Name<1-32> :chrisGroup Name<1-32> :RWPrivAuthtype(md5,<cr>none):md5Passphrase<8-32>:a good secretPrivacy(des,<cr>none) :desPassphrase<8-32>:a very good secretEnterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show snmp users 6-51=============================================UserName     :chrisGroupName    :RWPrivAuthType     :MD5   Passphrase:****************PrivType     :DES   Passphrase:****************=============================================Enterprise AP#show snmp group-assignments 6-51GroupName    :RWPrivUserName     :chrisEnterprise AP#
System Configuration5-445Configuring SNMPv3 Trap FiltersSNMP v3 users can be configured to receive notification messages from the access point. An SNMP Target ID is created that specifies the SNMP v3 user, IP address, and UDP port. A user-defined notification filter can be created so that specific notifications can be prevented from being sent to particular targets.The access point allows up to 10 notification filters to be created. Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries.To configure a new notification filter, click the New button. A new page opens to configure the filter (see below). To edit an existing filter, select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Edit button. To delete a filter, select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Delete button.When you click on the New button in the SNMP Trap Filters page, a new page opens where the filter parameters are configured. Define a filter name and subtree ID to be filtered. Select the filter type, include or exclude, from the drop-down list. Click Apply to create the filter.To add more subtree IDs to the filter, return to the SNMP Trap Filters page and click the Edit button. In the Edit page, click the New button to access the Add SNMP Notification Subtree page and configure a new subtree ID to be filtered.
SNMP5-455Note: Only the New Filter page allows the Filter ID to be configured.Filter ID – A user-defined name that identifies the filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)Subtree OID – Specifies MIB subtree to be filtered. The MIB subtree must be defined in the form “.1.3.6.1” and always start with a “.”.Filter Type – Indicates if the filter is to “include” or “exclude” the MIB subtree objects from the filter. Note that MIB objects included in the filter are not sent to the receiving target and objects excluded are sent. By default all traps are sent, so you can first use an “include” filter entry for all trap objects. Then use “exclude” entries for the required trap objects to send to the target. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined.CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters – To create a notification filter, use the snmp-server filter command from the CLI configuration mode. Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects. To view the current SNMP filters, use the show snmp filter command from the CLI Exec mode.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter    include .1 6-49Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter    exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show snmp filter 6-52Filter: trapfilter     Type: include  Subtree: iso     Type: exclude  Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23=============================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-465Configuring SNMPv3 TargetsAn SNMP v3 notification Target ID is specified by the SNMP v3 user, IP address, and UDP port. A user-defined filter can also be assigned to specific targets to limit the notifications received to specific MIB objects. (Note that the filter must first be configured. see “Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters” on page 5-44)To configure a new notification receiver target, click the New button. A new page opens to configure the settings (see below). To edit an existing target, select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Edit button. To delete targets, select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Delete button.When you click on the New or Edit button in the SNMP Targets page, a new page opens where the target parameters are configured. Define the parameters and select a filter, if required. Note that the SNMP v3 user name must first be defined (see “Configuring SNMPv3 Users” on page 5-42). Click Apply.Note: The Target ID cannot be changed in the Edit Target page. Only the New Target page allows the Target ID to be configured.
SNMP5-475Target ID – A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of notifications. The access point supports up to 10 target IDs. (Maximum length: 32 characters)IP Address – Specifies the IP address of the receiving management station.UDP Port – The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notification messages.SNMP User – The defined SNMP v3 user that is to receive notification messages.Assigned Filter – The name of a user-defined notification filter that is applied to the target.CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Targets – To create a notification target, use the snmp-server targets command from the CLI configuration mode. To assign a filter to a target, use the snmp-server filter-assignment command. To view the current SNMP targets, use the show snmp target command from the CLI Exec mode. To view filter assignment to targets, use the show snmp filter-assignments command.
System Configuration5-485Radio InterfaceThe IEEE 802.11b/g interface includes configuration options for radio signal characteristics and wireless security features. The IEEE 802.11g standard operates within the 2.4 GHz band at up to 54 Mbps. Also note that because the IEEE 802.11g standard is an extension of the IEEE 802.11b standard, it allows clients with 802.11b wireless network cards to associate to an 802.11g access point.The access point can operate in three modes, IEEE 802.11b only, 802.11g only, or a mixed 802.11b/g mode. Also note that 802.11g is backward compatible with 802.11b. Each radio supports up to eight virtual access point (VAP) interfaces numbered 0 to 7. Each VAP functions as a separate access point, and can be configured with its own Service Set Identification (SSID) and security settings. However, most radio signal parameters apply to all eight VAP interfaces. The VAPs function similar to a VLAN, with each VAP mapped to its own VLAN ID. Traffic to specific VAPs can be segregated based on user groups or application traffic. Each VAP can have up to 64 wireless clients, whereby the clients associate with these VAPs the same as they would with a physical access point. Note: The radio channel settings for the access point are limited by local regulations, which determine the number of channels that are available. Refer to “General Specifications” on page C-1 for additional information on the maximum number channels available. Note: You must first enable VAP interface 0 before the other interfaces can be enabled.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server targets mytraps    192.168.1.33 chris 6-48Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter-assignment    mytraps   trapfilter 6-50Enterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show snmp target 6-52Host ID      : mytrapsUser         : chrisIP Address   : 192.168.1.33UDP Port     : 162=============================Enterprise AP#show snmp filter-assignments 6-53                             HostID  FilterID                            mytraps  trapfilterEnterprise AP#
Radio Interface5-495Radio Channel – The radio channel that the access point uses to communicate with wireless clients. When multiple access points are deployed in the same area, set the channel on neighboring access points at least five channels apart to avoid interference with each other. For example, in the United States you can deploy up to three access points in the same area (e.g., channels 1, 6, 11). Also note that the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked. (Range: 1-11; Default: 1)Auto Channel Select – Enables the access point to automatically select an unoccupied radio channel. (Default: Enabled)Transmit Power – Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point. The higher the transmission power, the farther the transmission range. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also have to ensure that high-power signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in the service area. (Options: 100%, 50%, 25%, 12%, minimum; Default: 100%)Note: When operating the access point using 5 GHz channels in a European Community country, the end user and installer are obligated to operate the device in accordance with European regulatory requirements for Transmit Power Control (TPC).
System Configuration5-505Maximum Station Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access point transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface. The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the data rate, the longer the transmission distance. (Default: 54 Mbps)Maximum Associated Clients – Sets the maximum number of clients that can be associated with a VAP interface at the same time. (Range: 1-64 per VAP interface: Default: 64)Antenna ID – Selects the antenna to be used by the access point; either the integrated diversity antennas (the "Default Antenna") or an optional external antenna. The optional external antennas (if any) that are certified for use with the access point are listed in the drop-down menu. Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures that the access point's radio transmissions are within regulatory power limits for the country of operation. (Default: Default Antenna)Note: The Antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the Antenna Control Method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options. This access point does not support optional external antennas.Antenna Control Method - Selects the use of both fixed antennas operating in diversity mode or a single antenna. (Default: Diversity)• Diversity: The radio uses both antennas in a diversity system. Select this method when the Antenna ID is set to "Default Antenna" to use the access point's integrated antennas.• Right: The radio only uses the antenna on the right side (the side closest to the access point LEDs). Select this method when using an optional external antenna that is connected to the right antenna connector.• Left: The radio only uses the antenna on the left side (the side farthest from the access point LEDs). Select this method when using an optional external antenna that is connected to the left antenna connector.Antenna Location – Selects the mounting location of the antenna in use; either “Indoor” or “Outdoor.” Selecting the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio channels that are permitted in the country of operation. (Default: Indoor)MIC Mode – The Michael Integrity Check (MIC) is part of the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption used in Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted packet and this can impact throughput and performance. The access point supports a choice of software or hardware MIC calculation. The performance of the access point can be improved by selecting the best method for the specific deployment. (Default: Software)• Hardware: Provides best performance when the number of supported clients is less than 27.• Software: Provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one radio interface. Throughput may be reduced when the 802.11g interface is supporting a high number of clients simultaneously.
Radio Interface5-515Super G – The Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements are supported by the access point. These enhancements include bursting, compression, fast frames and dynamic turbo. Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients. (Default: Disabled)Radio Mode – Selects the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless interface. (Default: 802.11b+g)• 802.11b+g: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up to 54 Mbps).• 802.11b only: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point, but 802.11g clients can only transfer data at 802.11b standard rates (up to 11 Mbps).• 802.11g only: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up to 54 Mbps).Preamble – Sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a data transmission. (Default: Long)• Long: Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds). Using a long preamble ensures the access point can support all 802.11b and 802.11g clients.• Short or Long: Sets the preamble according to the capability of clients that are currently asscociated. Uses a short preamble (96 microseconds) if all associated clients can support it, otherwise a long preamble is used. The access point can increase data throughput when using a short preamble, but will only use a short preamble if it determines that all associated clients support it.Beacon Interval – The rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point. The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point. They may also carry power-management information. (Range: 20-1000 TUs; Default: 100 TUs)Data Beacon Rate – The rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions. Known also as the Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) interval, it indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic, which is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode. The default value of 2 indicates that the access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon. Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of broadcast/multicast frames.(Range: 1-255 beacons; Default: 1 beacon)Multicast Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access point transmits multicast and broadcast packets on the wireless interface. (Options: 24, 12, 6 Mbps; Default: 6 Mbps)
System Configuration5-525Fragmentation Length – Configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when passing through the access point. Fragmentation of the PDUs (Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability of transmissions because it increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size. If there is significant interference present, or collisions due to high network utilization, try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed up the retransmission of smaller frames. However, it is more efficient to set the fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires overhead to send multiple frames. (Range: 256-2346 bytes; Default: 2346 bytes)RTS Threshold – Sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS) signal must be sent to a receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications. The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a CTS (clear to send) frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data. If the RTS threshold is set to 0, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set to 2347, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled. The access points contending for the medium may not be aware of each other. The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node Problem.” (Range: 0-2347 bytes: Default: 2347 bytes)
Radio Interface5-535CLI Commands for Radio Settings – From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless g command to access the 802.11g radio interface. From the 802.11g interface mode, you can access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces. Use the turbo command to enable this feature before setting the radio channel with the channel command. Set any other radio setting  as required before enabling the VAP interface (with the no shutdown command). To view the current 802.11g radio settings for the VAP interface, use the show interface wireless g [0~7] command as shown on 6-95.Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super-g 6-104Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#channel 42 6-97Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#transmit-power full 6-97Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#speed 9 6-96Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna id 0000 6-100Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna control right 6-99Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna location indoor 6-101Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#mic_mode hardware 6-120Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super-g 7-104Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150 6-101Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150 6-101Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#dtim-period 5 6-102Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#multicast-data-rate 6 6-96Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#fragmentation-length 512 6-102Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rts-threshold 256 6-103Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
System Configuration5-545Configuring VAP Radio SettingsTo configure VAP radio settings, select the Radio Settings page.Default VLAN ID – The VLAN ID assigned to wireless clients associated to the VAP interface that are not assigned to a specific VLAN by RADIUS server configuration. (Default: 1)Closed System – When enabled, the VAP interface does not include its SSID in beacon messages. Nor does it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID. (Default: Disable)Authentication Timeout Interval – The time within which the client should finish authentication before authentication times out. (Range: 5-60 minutes; Default: 60 minutes)Association Timeout Interval – The idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface. (Range: 5-60 minutes; Default: 30 minutes)
Radio Interface5-555WPA2 PMKSA Life Time – WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security settings in a cache for each VAP. In this way, when clients roam back into a VAP they had previously been using, re-authentication is not required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate the other keys used for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a client Security Association (SA) that the VAP holds in a cache. When the lifetime expires, the security association and keys are deleted from the cache. If the client returns to an access point after the association has been deleted, it will require full re-authentication. (Range: 1-1440 minutes; Default: 720 minutes)CLI Commands for the Configuring the VAPs – From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless g command to access the 802.11b/g radio interface. From the 802.11b/g interface mode, you can access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces. To access a specific VAP interface (numbered 0 to 7), use the vap command. You can configure a name for each interface using the description command. You can also use the closed-system command to stop sending the SSID in beacon messages. Set any other VAP parameters and radio setting  as required before enabling the VAP interface (with the no shutdown command). To view the current 802.11b/g radio settings for the VAP interface, use the show interface wireless g 0 command as shown on 6-95.Configuring Rogue AP DetectionTo configure Rouge AP detection, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll down to the “Rouge AP” section.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0 6-95Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#description RD-AP#3 6-104Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#vlan-id 1 6-129Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#closed-system 6-105Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#authentication-timeout-  interval 30 6-106Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#association-timeout-    interval 20 6-106Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#max-association 32 6-106Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#pmksa-lifetime 900 6-121Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
System Configuration5-565Rogue AP – A “rogue AP” is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue APs can allow unauthorized access to the network, or  fool client stations into mistakenly associating with them and thereby blocking access to network resources. The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range. A database of nearby access points is maintained where any rogue APs can be identified. During a scan, Syslog messages (see “Enabling System Logging” on page 5-32) are sent for each access point detected. Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID (MAC address) or SSID configuration.• AP Detection – Enables the periodic scanning for other access points. (Default: Disable)• AP Scan Interval – Sets the time between each rogue AP scan. (Range: 30 -10080 minutes; Default: 720 minutes)• AP Scan Duration – Sets the length of time for each rogue AP scan. A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area, but causes more disruption to client access. (Range: 100 -1000 milliseconds; Default: 350 milliseconds)• Rogue AP Authenticate – Enables or disables RADIUS authentication. Enabling RADIUS Authentication allows the access point to discover rogue access points. With RADIUS authentication enabled, the access point checks the MAC address/ Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of each access point that it finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the access point is allowed. With RADIUS authentication disabled, the access point can detect its neighboring access points only; it cannot identify whether the access points are allowed or are rogues. If you enable RADIUS authentication, you must configure a RADIUS server for this access point (see “RADIUS” on page 5-7).• Scan AP Now – Starts an immediate rogue AP scan on the radio interface. (Default: Disable)Note: While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.CLI Commands for Rogue AP Detection – From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless command to access the 802.11g radio interface. From the wireless interface mode, use the rogue-ap enable command to enable rogue AP detection. Set the duration and interval times with the rogue-ap duration and rogue-ap interval commands. If required, start an immediate scan using the
Radio Interface5-575rogue-ap scan command. To view the database of detected access points, use the show rogue-ap command from the Exec level.Configuring Wi-Fi MultimediaWireless networks offer an equal opportunity for all devices to transmit data from any type of application. Although this is acceptable for most applications, multimedia applications (with audio and video) are particularly sensitive to the delay and throughput variations that result from this “equal opportunity” wireless access method. For multimedia applications to run well over a wireless network, a Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism is required to prioritize traffic types and provide an “enhanced opportunity” wireless access method.The access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard. Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter operate with both WMM- enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality.Access Categories — WMM defines four access categories (ACs): voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see Table 5-1). The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate inter operability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients.Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap enable 6-110configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap duration 200 6-111Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap interval 120 6-112Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap scan 6-112Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogueApDetect Completed (Radio G) : 5 APs detectedrogueAPDetect (Radio G): refreshing ap database nowEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#exitEnterprise AP#show rogue-ap 6-113802.11g Channel : Rogue AP StatusAP Address(BSSID)            SSID   Channel(MHz) RSSI=======================================================00-04-e2-2a-37-23         WLAN1AP   11(2462 MHz)   1700-04-e2-2a-37-3d             ANY    7(2442 MHz)   4200-04-e2-2a-37-49         WLAN1AP    9(2452 MHz)   4200-90-d1-08-9d-a7         WLAN1AP    1(2412 MHz)   1200-30-f1-fb-31-f4            WLAN    6(2437 MHz)   16Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-585WMM Operation — WMM uses traffic priority based on the four ACs; Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background. The higher the AC priority, the higher the probability that data is transmitted. When the access point forwards traffic, WMM adds data packets to four independent transmit queues, one for each AC, depending on the 802.1D priority tag of the packet. Data packets without a priority tag are always added to the Best Effort AC queue. From the four queues, an internal “virtual” collision resolution mechanism first selects data with the highest priority to be granted a transmit opportunity. Then the same collision resolution mechanism is used externally to determine which device has access to the wireless medium. For each AC queue, the collision resolution mechanism is dependent on two timing parameters:• AIFSN (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space Number), a number used to calculate the minimum time between data frames• CW (Contention Window), a number used to calculate a random backoff timeAfter a collision detection, a backoff wait time is calculated. The total wait time is the sum of a minimum wait time (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space, or AIFS) determined from the AIFSN, and a random backoff time calculated from a value selected from zero to the CW. The CW value varies within a configurable range. It starts at CWMin and doubles after every collision up to a maximum value, CWMax. After a successful transmission, the CW value is reset to its CWMin value.Table 5-1. WMM Access CategoriesAccess Category WMM Designation Description 802.1D TagsAC_VO (AC3) Voice Highest priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as VoIP (Voice over IP) calls. 7, 6AC_VI (AC2) Video High priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as streaming video. 5, 4AC_BE (AC0) Best Effort Normal priority, medium delay and throughput. Data only affected by long delays. Data from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities.0, 3AC_BK (AC1) Background Lowest priority. Data with no delay or throughput requirements, such as bulk data transfers. 2, 1
Radio Interface5-595Figure 5-1.   WMM Backoff Wait TimesFor high-priority traffic, the AIFSN and CW values are smaller. The smaller values equate to less backoff and wait time, and therefore more transmit opportunities.To configure WMM, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll down to the WMM configuration settings.AIFS Random BackoffAIFS Random BackoffCWMin CWMaxCWMinCTimriorityriorityMinimum Wait Time Random Wait TimeMinimum Wait Time Random Wait Time
System Configuration5-605WMM – Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point. When enabled, the parameters for each AC queue will be employed on the access point and QoS capabilities are advertised to WMM-enabled clients. (Default: Support)• Disable: WMM is disabled.• Support: WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this feature. Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the access point.• Required: WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point.WMM Acknowledge Policy – By default, all wireless data transmissions require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. WMM allows the acknowledgement wait time to be turned off for each Access Category (AC). Although this increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy. (Default: Acknowledge)WMM BSS Parameters – These parameters apply to the wireless clients.WMM AP Parameters – These parameters apply to the access point.•logCWMin (Minimum Contention Window) – The initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the CWMin value. Specify the CWMin value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the CWMin value must be equal or less than the CWMax value.•logCWMax (Maximum Contention Window) – The maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the CWMax value. Specify the CWMax value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the CWMin value. •AIFS (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space) – The minimum amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt. Specify the AIFS value in the range 0-15 microseconds. •TXOP Limit (Transmit Opportunity Limit) – The maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data-rate traffic. Specify a value in the range 0-65535 microseconds.•Admission Control – The admission control mode for the access category. When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category. (Default: Disabled) Key Type – See “Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)” on page 5-68.
Radio Interface5-615CLI Commands for WMM – Enter interface wireless mode and type wmm required for clients that want to associate with the access point. The wmm-acknowledge-policy command is used to enable or disable a policy for each access category. The wmmparms command defines detailed WMM parameters.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm required6-131Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm-acknowledge-policy 0 noack6-131Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmmparams ap 0 4 6 3 1 16-132
System Configuration5-625To view the current 802.11g radio settings for the VAP interface, use the show interface wireless g 0 command.Enterprise AP#show interface wireless g 0 6-108Wireless Interface Information=============================================================--------------------Identification---------------------------Description                     : SMC 802.11g Access PointSSID                            : SMC_G 0Turbo Mode                      : DISABLEDChannel                         : 36 (AUTO)Status                          : DISABLEDMAC Address                     : 00:12:cf:05:95:0c----------------802.11 Parameters---------------------------Transmit Power                  : FULL (16 dBm)Max Station Data Rate           : 54MbpsMulticast Data Rate             : 6MbpsFragmentation Threshold         : 2346 bytesRTS Threshold                   : 2347 bytesBeacon Interval                 : 100 TUsAuthentication Timeout Interval : 60 MinsAssociation Timeout Interval    : 30 MinsDTIM Interval                   : 1 beaconMaximum Association             : 64 stationsMIC Mode                        : SoftwareSuper A                         : DisabledVLAN ID                         : 1----------------Security-------------------------------------Closed System                   : DisabledMulticast cipher                : WEPWPA clients                     : TKIP and AESWPA Key Mgmt Mode               : PRE SHARED KEYWPA PSK Key Type                : PASSPHRASEEncryption                      : DISABLEDDefault Transmit Key            : 1Common Static Keys              : Key 1: EMPTY     Key 2: EMPTY                                  Key 3: EMPTY     Key 4: EMPTYAuthentication Type             : OPEN----------------802.1x---------------------------------------802.1x                          :Broadcast Key Refresh Rate      : 30 minSession Key Refresh Rate        : 30 min802.1x Session Timeout Value    : 0 min----------------Antenna--------------------------------------Antenna Control method          : DiversityAntenna ID                      : 0x0000(Default Antenna)Antenna Location                : Indoor
Radio Interface5-635----------------Quality of Service---------------------------WMM Mode                        : SUPPORTEDWMM Acknowledge PolicyAC0(Best Effort)                : AckAC1(Background)                 : AcknowledgeAC2(Video)                      : AcknowledgeAC3(Voice)                      : AcknowledgeWMM BSS ParametersAC0(Best Effort)                : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  3                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC1(Background)                 : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  7                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC2(Video)                      : logCwMin:  3  logCwMax:  4  AIFSN:  2                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 3.008 msAC3(Voice)                      : logCwMin:  2  logCwMax:  3  AIFSN:  2                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 1.504 msWMM AP ParametersAC0(Best Effort)                : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax:  6  AIFSN:  3                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC1(Background)                 : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  7                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC2(Video)                      : logCwMin:  3  logCwMax:  4  AIFSN:  1                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 3.008 msAC3(Voice)                      : logCwMin:  2  logCwMax:  3  AIFSN:  1                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms=============================================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-645SecurityThe access point is configured by default as an “open system,” which broadcasts a beacon signal including the configured SSID. Wireless clients with an SSID setting of “any” can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their SSID to allow immediate connection to the nearest access point. To improve wireless network security, you have to implement two main functions:• Authentication: It must be verified that clients attempting to connect to the network are authorized users.• Traffic Encryption: Data passing between the access point and clients must be protected from interception and eavesdropping.For a more secure network, the access point can implement one or a combination of the following security mechanisms:• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)page 5-63• IEEE 802.1Xpage 5-15• Wireless MAC address filteringpage 5-13• Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2)page 5-73Both WEP and WPA security settings are configurable separately for each virtual access point (VAP) interface. MAC address filtering, and RADIUS server settings are global and apply to all VAP interfaces.The security mechanisms that may be employed depend on the level of security required, the network and management resources available, and the software support provided on wireless clients.A summary of wireless security considerations is listed in the following table.Table 5-2. Wireless Security ConsiderationsSecurity Mechanism Client Support Implementation ConsiderationsWEP Built-in support on all 802.11g devices • Provides only weak security• Requires manual key managementWEP over 802.1X Requires 802.1X client support in system or by add-in software(support provided in Windows 2000 SP3 or later and Windows XP)• Provides dynamic key rotation for improved WEP security• Requires configured RADIUS server• 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and serverMAC Address Filtering Uses the MAC address of client network card • Provides only weak user authentication• Management of authorized MAC addresses• Can be combined with other methods for improved security• Optionally configured RADIUS server
Radio Interface5-655Note: You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.WPA over 802.1X Mode Requires WPA-enabled system and network card driver(native support provided in Windows XP)• Provides robust security in WPA-only mode (i.e., WPA clients only)• Offers support for legacy WEP clients, but with increased security risk (i.e., WEP authentication keys disabled)• Requires configured RADIUS server• 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and serverWPA PSK Mode Requires WPA-enabled system and network card driver(native support provided in Windows XP)• Provides good security in small networks• Requires manual management of pre-shared keyWPA2 with 802.1X Requires WPA-enabled system and network card driver (native support provided in Windows XP)• Provides the strongest security in WPA2-only mode• Provides robust security in mixed mode for WPA and WPA2 clients• Offers fast roaming for time-sensitive client applications• Requires configured RADIUS server• 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and server• Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2 compliantWPA2 PSK Mode Requires WPA-enabled system and network card driver (native support provided in Windows XP)• Provides robust security in small networks• Requires manual management of pre-shared key• Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2 compliantTable 5-2. Wireless Security ConsiderationsSecurity Mechanism Client Support Implementation Considerations
System Configuration5-665The access point can simultaneously support clients using various different security mechanisms. The configuration for these security combinations are outlined in the following table. Note that MAC address authentication can be configured independently to work with all security mechanisms and is indicated separately in the table. Required RADIUS server support is also listed.Table 5-3. Security CombinationsClient SecurityCombination Configuration SummaryaMACAuthenticationbRADIUSServerNo encryption and no authentication Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: Open SystemEncryption: Disable802.1x: DisableLocal, RADIUS, or Disabled Yes3Static WEP only (with or without shared key authentication)Enter 1 to 4 WEP keysSelect a WEP transmit key for the interfaceInterface Detail Settings:Authentication: Shared Key or Open SystemEncryption: Enable802.1x: Disable Local, RADIUS, or Disabled YescDynamic WEP (802.1x) only Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: Open SystemEncryption: Enable802.1x: RequiredSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal, RADIUS, or Disabled Yesc802.1x WPA only Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPAEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: TKIP802.1x: RequiredSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal only YesWPA Pre-Shared Key only Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPA-PSKEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: TKIP802.1x: DisableWPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or AlphanumericEnter a WPA Pre-shared keyLocal only NoStatic and dynamic (802.1x) WEP keys Enter 1 to 4 WEP keysSelect a WEP transmit keyInterface Detail Settings:Authentication: Open SystemEncryption: Enable802.1x: SupportedSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal, RADIUS, or Disabled Yes
Radio Interface5-675Dynamic WEP and 802.1x WPA Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPAEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: SupportedCipher Suite: WEP802.1x: RequiredSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal or Disabled YesStatic and dynamic (802.1x) WEP keys and 802.1x WPAEnter 1 to 4 WEP keysSelect a WEP transmit keyInterface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPAEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: SupportedCipher Suite: WEP802.1x: SupportedSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal or Disabled Yes802.1x WPA2 only Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPA2Encryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: AES-CCMP802.1x: RequiredSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal or Disabled YesWPA2 Pre-Shared Key only Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPA2-PSKEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: AES-CCMP802.1x: DisableWPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or AlphanumericEnter a WPA Pre-shared keyLocal or Disabled No802.1x WPA-WPA2 Mixed Mode Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPA-WPA2-mixedEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: TKIP802.1x: RequiredSet 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication ratesLocal or Disabled YesWPA-WPA2 Mixed Mode Pre-Shared Key Interface Detail Settings:Authentication: WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixedEncryption: EnableWPA Clients: RequiredCipher Suite: TKIP802.1x: DisableWPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or AlphanumericEnter a WPA Pre-shared keyLocal or Disabled NoTable 5-3. Security CombinationsClient SecurityCombination Configuration SummaryaMACAuthenticationbRADIUSServer
System Configuration5-685Note: If you choose to configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1X, the RADIUS MAC address authentication occurs prior to 802.1X authentication. Only when RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds is 802.1X authentication performed. When RADIUS MAC authentication fails, 802.1X authentication is not performed.Enabling the VAPsBefore enabling the Virtual Access Point (VAP) radio interfaces, first configure all of the relevant raido settings (see “You must first enable VAP interface 0 before the other interfaces can be enabled.” on page 5-48.)After you have configured the radio settings, select Security under Radio G, set an SSID to identify the wireless network service provided by each VAP you want to use, and then click Apply to save your settings. Before enabling the radio service for any VAP, first configure the WEP, WPA, and 802.1X security settings described in the following sections. After you have finished configuring the security settings, return to the main Security page shown below, start the required VAP interfaces by clicking the Enable checkbox, and then click Apply.  a. The configuration summary does not include the set up for MAC authentication (see page 4-15) or RADIUS server (see page 2-9).b. The configuration of RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1x WPA or WPA Pre-shared Key is not supported.c. RADIUS server required only when RADIUS MAC authentication is configured.
Radio Interface5-695Enable – Enables radio communications on the VAP interface. (Default: Disabled)Note: You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable other VAP interfaces.SSID – The name of the basic service set provided by a VAP interface. Clients that want to connect to the network through the access point must set their SSID to the same as that of an access point VAP interface. (Default: SMC_G # (0 to 7); Range: 1-32 characters)Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) WEP provides a basic level of security, preventing unauthorized access to the network, and encrypting data transmitted between wireless clients and the access point. WEP uses static shared keys (fixed-length hexadecimal or alphanumeric strings) that are manually distributed to all clients that want to use the network.WEP is the security protocol initially specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless communications. Unfortunately, WEP has been found to be seriously flawed and cannot be recommended for a high level of network security. For more robust wireless security, the access point provides Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) for improved data encryption and user authentication.Setting up shared keys enables the basic IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) on the access point to prevent unauthorized access to the network.If you choose to use WEP shared keys instead of an open system, be sure to define at least one static WEP key for user authentication and data encryption. Also, be sure that the WEP shared keys are the same for each client in the wireless network.Note that all clients share the same keys, which are used for user authentication and data encryption. Up to four keys can be specified. These four keys are used for all VAP interfaces on the same radio.To set up WEP shared keys, click Radio Settings. Key Type – Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys on the access point and enter up to four keys:• Hexadecimal: Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) for 64 bit keys, 26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys, or 32 hexadecimal digits for 152 bit keys. This is the default setting.
System Configuration5-705• Alphanumeric: Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys, 13 alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys, or 16 alphanumeric characters for 152 bit keys.Key Number – Selects the key number to use for encryption for each VAP interface. If the clients have all four keys configured to the same values, you can change the encryption key to any of the eight settings without having to update the client keys. (Default: Key 1)Shared Key Setup – Select 64 Bit, 128 Bit, or 152 Bit key length. Note that the same size of encryption key must be supported on all wireless clients. (Default: None)Note: Key index and type must match that configured on the clients.Note: In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static WEP keys and WPA, select WEP transmit key index 2, 3, or 4. The access point uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys.To enable WEP shared keys for a VAP interface, click Security under Radio G. Then, select the VAP interface that will use WEP keys by clicking More, and configure the Authentication Type Setup and Encryption fields. Authentication Type Setup – Sets the access point to communicate as an open system that accepts network access attempts from any client, or with clients using pre-configured static shared keys. (Default: Open System)• Open System: If you don’t set up any other security mechanism on the access point, the network has no protection and is open to all users. This is the default setting.• Shared Key: Sets the access point to use WEP shared keys. If this option is selected, you must configure at least one key on the access point and all clients.
Radio Interface5-715Note: To use 802.1X on wireless clients requires a network card driver and 802.1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use. Windows 2000 SP3 or later and Windows XP provide 802.1X client support. Windows XP also provides native WPA support. Other systems require additional client software to support 802.1X and WPA.Encryption – Enable or disable the access point to use data encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES). If this option is selected when using static WEP keys, you must configure at least one key on the access point and all clients. (Default: Disabled)Note: You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.CLI Commands for WEP Shared Key Security – To enable WEP shared key security for the 802.11g interface, use the interface wireless g command from the CLI configuration mode to access the interface mode for the 802.11g radio.  First use the key command to define up to four WEP keys that can be used for all VAP interfaces on the radio. Then use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure other security settings.From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the authentication command to enable WEP shared-key authentication and the encryption command to enable data encryption. Then set one key as the transmit key for the VAP interface using the transmit-key command. To view the current security settings, use the  show interface wireless g 0 command from the Exec mode.
System Configuration5-725Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#key 1 128 ascii abcdeabcdeabc 6-117Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0 6-95Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#no 802.1X 6-65Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#authentication shared 6-117Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryption 6-116Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#transmit-key 1 6-118Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#exitEnterprise AP#show interface wireless g 0 6-108Wireless Interface Information========================================================================----------------Identification------------------------------------------Description                     : SMC 802.11g Access PointSSID                            : SMC_G 0Channel                         : 11 (AUTO)Status                          : DISABLEDMAC Address                     : 00:12:cf:05:95:08----------------802.11 Parameters----------------------------------------Radio Mode                      : b & g mixed modeTransmit Power                  : FULL (5 dBm)Max Station Data Rate           : 54MbpsMulticast Data Rate             : 5.5MbpsFragmentation Threshold         : 2346 bytesRTS Threshold                   : 2347 bytesBeacon Interval                 : 100 TUsAuthentication Timeout Interval : 60 MinsAssociation Timeout Interval    : 30 MinsDTIM Interval                   : 1 beaconPreamble Length                 : SHORT-OR-LONGMaximum Association             : 64 stationsMIC Mode                        : SoftwareSuper G                         : DisabledVLAN ID                         : 1
Radio Interface5-735----------------Security------------------------------------------------Closed System                   : DisabledMulticast cipher                : WEPUnicast cipher                  : TKIP and AESWPA clients                     : DISABLEDWPA Key Mgmt Mode               : PRE SHARED KEYWPA PSK Key Type                : PASSPHRASEWPA PSK Key                     : EMPTYPMKSA Lifetime                  : 720 minutesEncryption                      : DISABLEDDefault Transmit Key            : 1Common Static Keys              : Key 1: EMPTY     Key 2: EMPTY                                  Key 3: EMPTY     Key 4: EMPTYPre-Authentication              : DISABLEDAuthentication Type             : OPEN----------------802.1x--------------------------------------------------802.1x                          : DISABLEDBroadcast Key Refresh Rate      : 30 minSession Key Refresh Rate        : 30 min802.1x Session Timeout Value    : 0 min----------------Antenna-------------------------------------------------Antenna Control method          : DiversityAntenna ID                      : 0x0000(Default Antenna)Antenna Location                : Indoor----------------Quality of Service---------------------------------------WMM Mode                        : SUPPORTEDWMM Acknowledge PolicyAC0(Best Effort)                : AcknowledgeAC1(Background)                 : AcknowledgeAC2(Video)                      : AcknowledgeAC3(Voice)                      : AcknowledgeWMM BSS ParametersAC0(Best Effort)                : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  3                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC1(Background)                 : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  7                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC2(Video)                      : logCwMin:  3  logCwMax:  4  AIFSN:  2                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 3.008 msAC3(Voice)                      : logCwMin:  2  logCwMax:  3  AIFSN:  2                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 1.504 msWMM AP ParametersAC0(Best Effort)                : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax:  6  AIFSN:  3                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC1(Background)                 : logCwMin:  4  logCwMax: 10  AIFSN:  7                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 0.000 msAC2(Video)                      : logCwMin:  3  logCwMax:  4  AIFSN:  1                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 3.008 msAC3(Voice)                      : logCwMin:  2  logCwMax:  3  AIFSN:  1                                  Admission Control: No                                  TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms========================================================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-745CLI Commands for WEP over 802.1X Security – Use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure the security settings. First set 802.1X to required using the 802.1x command and set the 802.1X key refresh rates. Then, use the authentication command to select open system authentication and the encryption command to enable data encryption. To view the current security settings, use the show interface wireless g 0 command (not shown in example). Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced security solution for 802.11 wireless networks. The access point supports the following WPA components and features:IEEE 802.1X and the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP): WPA employs 802.1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key management. The 802.1X client and RADIUS server should use an appropriate EAP type—such as EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security), EAP-TTLS (Tunneled TLS), or PEAP (Protected EAP)—for strongest authentication. Working together, these protocols provide “mutual authentication” between a client, the access point, and a RADIUS server that prevents users from accidentally joining a rogue network. Only when a RADIUS server has authenticated a user’s credentials will encryption keys be sent to the access point and client.Note: To implement WPA on wireless clients requires a WPA-enabled network card driver and 802.1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use. Windows XP provides native WPA support, other systems require additional software.Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP): WPA specifies TKIP as the data encryption method to replace WEP. TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption keys. Basically, TKIP starts with a master (temporal) key for each user session and then mathematically generates other keys to encrypt each data packet. TKIP provides further data encryption enhancements by including a message integrity check for each packet and a re-keying mechanism, which periodically changes the master key. Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X required 6-65Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5 6-66Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-key-refresh-rate 5 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-timeout 300 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#authentication open 6-117Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryption 6-116Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
Radio Interface5-755WPA Pre-Shared Key Mode (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK): For enterprise deployment, WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired network. However, for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre-shared password for network access. The Pre-Shared Key mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered on the access point and all wireless clients. The PSK mode uses the same TKIP packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise, providing a robust and manageable alternative for small networks.Mixed WPA and WEP Client Support: WPA enables the access point to indicate its supported encryption and authentication mechanisms to clients using its beacon signal. WPA-compatible clients can likewise respond to indicate their WPA support. This enables the access point to determine which clients are using WPA security and which are using legacy WEP. The access point uses TKIP unicast data encryption keys for WPA clients and WEP unicast keys for WEP clients. The global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients, therefore it restricts encryption to a WEP key.When access is opened to both WPA and WEP clients, no authentication is provided for the WEP clients through shared keys. To support authentication for WEP clients in this mixed mode configuration, you can use either MAC authentication or 802.1X authentication.WPA2 – WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP pending the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i wireless security standard. In effect, the WPA security features are a subset of the 802.11i standard. WPA2 includes the now ratified 802.11i standard, but also offers backward compatibility with WPA. Therefore, WPA2 includes the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. The main differences and enhancements in WPA2 can be summarized as follows:•Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): WPA2 uses AES Counter-Mode encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2-compliant hardware.•WPA2 Mixed-Mode: WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common SSID interface. In mixed mode, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or AES-CCMP) is negotiated for each client. The access point advertises its supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in the association request to the access point. For mixed-mode operation,
System Configuration5-765the cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed.•Key Caching: WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security information in a cache, so that if a client roams away from an access point and then returns, re-authentication is not required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a Security Association that the access point names and holds in a cache. •Preauthentication: Each time a client roams to another access point it has to be fully re-authenticated. This authentication process is time consuming and can disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes a mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated. The first time a client is authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated. When the client is about to roam to another access point in the network, the access point sends pre-authentication messages to the new access point that include the client’s security association information. Then when the client sends an association request to the new access point, the client is known to be already authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association.
Radio Interface5-775To configure WPA, click Security under Radio G. Select one of the VAP interfaces by clicking More. Select one of the WPA options in the Authentication Setup table, and then configure the parameters displayed beneath the table.The WPA configuration parameters are described below:Encryption – You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point. Pre-Authentication – When using WPA2 over 802.1X, pre-authentication can be enabled, which allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated without performing full 802.1X authentication. (Default: Disabled)Authentication Setup –  To use WPA or WPA2, set the access point to one of the following options. If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected (WPA, WPA2, or WPA-WPA2-mixed), the 802.1X settings and RADIUS server details need to be configured. Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling authentication. If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or WPA-WPA2 PSK-Mixed), be sure to specify the key string.
System Configuration5-785• WPA: Clients using WPA over 802.1X are accepted for authentication.• WPA-PSK: Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.• WPA2: Clients using WPA2 over 802.1X are accepted for authentication.• WPA2-PSK: Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.• WPA-WPA2-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 over 802.1X are accepted for authentication.• WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.WPA Configuration – Each VAP interface can be configured to allow only WPA-enabled clients to access the network (Required), or to allow access to both WPA and WEP clients (Supported). (Default: Required)Cipher Suite – Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic, which is supported by all wireless clients.• WEP: WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. You should select WEP only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported. • TKIP: TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher.• AES-CCMP: AES-CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-CCMP is the standard encryption cipher required for WPA2.WPA Pre-Shared Key Type – If the WPA or WPA2 pre-shared-key mode is used, all wireless clients must be configured with the same key to communicate with the access point.• Hexadecimal – Enter a key as a string of 64 hexadecimal numbers.• Alphanumeric – Enter a key as an easy-to-remember form of letters and numbers. The string must be from 8 to 63 characters, which can include spaces.The configuration settings for WPA are summarized below:Table 5-4. WPA Configuration SettingsWPA and WPA2 pre-shared key only WPA and WPA2 over 802.1XEncryption: EnabledAuthentication Setup: WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or WPA-WPA2-mixedWPA Cipher Mode: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMPWPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hex/ASCIIEncryption: EnabledAuthentication Setup: WPA, WPA2, WPA-WPA2-mixedWPA Cipher Mode: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMP(requires RADIUS server to be specified)1: You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption in the access point. 2: Select TKIP when any WPA clients do not support AES. Select AES only if all clients support AES.
Radio Interface5-795CLI Commands for WPA Using Pre-shared Key Security – Be sure to first disable 802.1X port authentication using the 802.1X command from the configuration mode. Then, from the 802.11g interface configuration mode, use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure other security settings.From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the authentication command to set the access point to “Open System.” Use the encryption command to enable data encryption. To enable WPA to be required for all clients, use the wpa-clients command. Set the broadcast and multicast key encryption using the multicast-cipher command. Use the wpa-mode command to enable the Pre-shared Key mode. To enter a key value, use the wpa-psk-type command to specify a hexadecimal or alphanumeric key, and then use the wpa-pre-shared-key command to define the key. To view the current security settings, use the show interface wireless g 0 command (not shown in example).Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#no 802.1X 6-65Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key    passphrase-key agoodsecret 6-121Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth wpa-psk requiredData Encryption is set to Enabled.WPA2 Clients Mode is set to Disabled.WPA Clients Mode is set to Required.WPA Multicast Cipher is set to TKIP.WPA Unicast Cipher can accept TKIP only.WPA Authentication is set to Pre-Shared Key.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
System Configuration5-805CLI Commands for WPA Over 802.1X Security – First set 802.1X to required using the 802.1X command and set the 802.1X key refresh rates. Then 802.11g interface configuration mode, use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure other security settings. From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the authentication command to select open system authentication and the encryption command to enable data encryption. Use the wpa-clients command to set WPA to be required or supported for clients. Use the wpa-mode command to enable WPA dynamic keys over 802.1X. Set the broadcast and multicast key encryption using the multicast-cipher command. To view the current security settings use the show interface wireless g 0 command (not shown in example).Configuring 802.1XIEEE 802.1X is a standard framework for network access control that uses a central RADIUS server for user authentication. This control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X client application to submit user credentials for authentication. The 802.1X standard uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to pass user credentials (either digital certificates, user names and passwords, or other) from the client to the RADIUS server. Client authentication is then verified on the RADIUS server before the access point grants client access to the network.The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients. Session keys are unique to each client and are used to encrypt and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point. You can also enable broadcast key rotation, so the access point provides a dynamic broadcast key and changes it at a specified interval. Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g 6-88Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.required 6-65Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5 6-66Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-key-refresh-rate 5 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-timeout 300 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#authentication open 6-117Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryption 6-116Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-clients required 6-121Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#multicast-cipher TKIP 6-119Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
Radio Interface5-815Open the Security page, and click More for one of the VAP interfaces.You can enable 802.1X as optionally supported or as required to enhance the security of the wireless network. (Default: Disable)• Disable: The access point does not support 802.1X authentication for any wireless client. After successful wireless association with the access point, each client is allowed to access the network.• Supported: The access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does not initiate 802.1X authentication). For clients initiating 802.1X, only those successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those clients not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful wireless association with the access point. The 802.1X supported mode allows access for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security.• Required: The access point enforces 802.1X authentication for all associated wireless clients. If 802.1X authentication is not initiated by a client, the access point will initiate authentication. Only those clients successfully authenticated with 802.1X are allowed to access the network.Note: If 802.1X is enabled on the access point, then RADIUS setup must be completed (see “RADIUS” on page 5-7).When 802.1X is enabled, the broadcast and session key rotation intervals can also be configured.• Broadcast Key Refresh Rate: Sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying. (Range: 0-1440 minutes; Default: 0 means disabled)• Session Key Refresh Rate: The interval at which the access point refreshes unicast session keys for associated clients. (Range: 0-1440 minutes; Default: 0 means disabled)
System Configuration5-825• 802.1X Reauthentication Refresh Rate: The time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. During the re-authentication process of verifying the client’s credentials on the RADIUS server, the client remains connected the network. Only if re-authentication fails is network access blocked. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 means disabled)CLI Commands for 802.1X Authentication – Use the 802.1X supported command from the VAP interface mode to enable 802.1X authentication. Set the session and broadcast key refresh rate, and the re-authentication timeout. To display the current settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec mode.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X supported 6-65Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5 6-66Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-key-refresh-rate 5 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-timeout 300 6-67Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#exitEnterprise AP#show authentication 6-68Authentication Information===========================================================MAC Authentication Server      : DISABLEDMAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min802.1x supplicant              : DISABLED802.1x supplicant user         : EMPTY802.1x supplicant password     : EMPTYAddress Filtering              : ALLOWEDSystem Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.Filter TableMAC Address             Status-----------------       ----------00-70-50-cc-99-1a       DENIED00-70-50-cc-99-1b       ALLOWED=========================================================Enterprise AP#
Status Information5-835Status InformationThe Status page includes information on the following items:Access Point StatusThe AP Status window displays basic system configuration settings, as well as the settings for the wireless interface.Menu Description PageAP Status  Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the wireless interface 5-82Station Status  Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point 5-85Event Logs  Shows log messages stored in memory 5-88
System Configuration5-845AP System Configuration – The AP System Configuration table displays the basic system configuration settings:• System Up Time: Length of time the management agent has been up.• MAC Address: The physical layer address for this device.• System Name: Name assigned to this system.• System Contact: Administrator responsible for the system.• IP Address: IP address of the management interface for this device.• IP Default Gateway: IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments.• HTTP Server: Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.• HTTP Server Port: Shows the TCP port used by the HTTP interface.• Version: Shows the version number for the runtime code.AP Wireless Configuration – The AP Wireless Configuration tables display the radio and VAP interface settings listed below. Note that Interface Wireless G refers the 802.11b/g radio.• SSID: The service set identifier for the VAP interface.• Radio Channel: The radio channel through which the access point communicates with wireless clients.• Encryption: The key size used for data encryption.• Authentication Type: Shows the type of authentication used.• 802.1X: Shows if IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients is enabled.
Status Information5-855CLI Commands for Displaying System Settings – To view the current access point system settings, use the show system command from the Exec mode. To view the current radio interface settings, use the show interface wireless g 0 command (see page 6-108).Enterprise AP#show system 6-23System Information==============================================================Serial Number         :System Up time        : 1 days, 3 hours, 41 minutes, 40 secondsSystem Name           : Enterprise Wireless APSystem Location       :System Contact        : ContactSystem Country Code   : US - UNITED STATESMAC Address           : 00-13-F7-1C-33-66MAC Address           : 00-13-F7-1C-33-66Radio G MAC Address   : 00-13-F7-1C-33-67IP Address            : 192.168.2.2Subnet Mask           : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway       : 0.0.0.0VLAN State            : DISABLEDManagement VLAN ID(AP): 1IAPP State            : ENABLEDDHCP Client           : ENABLEDHTTP Server           : ENABLEDHTTP Server Port      : 80HTTP Session Timeout  : 300   sec(s)HTTPS Server          : ENABLEDHTTPS Server Port     : 443Slot Status           : Single band(b/g)Boot Rom Version      : v1.1.1Software Version      : v5.0.0.0SSH Server            : ENABLEDSSH Server Port       : 22Telnet Server         : ENABLEDWEB Redirect          : DISABLEDDHCP Relay            : DISABLED==============================================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-865Station StatusThe Station Status window shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point.The Station Configuration page displays basic connection information for all associated stations as described below. Note that this page is automatically refreshed every five seconds. • Station Address: The MAC address of the wireless client.• Authenticated: Shows if the station has been authenticated. The two basic methods of authentication supported for 802.11 wireless networks are “open system” and “shared key.” Open-system authentication accepts any client attempting to connect to the access point without verifying its identity. The
Status Information5-875shared-key approach uses Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) to verify client identity by distributing a shared key to stations before attempting authentication.• Associated: Shows if the station has been successfully associated with the access point. Once authentication is completed, stations can associate with the current access point, or reassociate with a new access point. The association procedure allows the wireless system to track the location of each mobile client, and ensure that frames destined for each client are forwarded to the appropriate access point.• Forwarding Allowed: Shows if the station has passed 802.1X authentication and is now allowed to forward traffic to the access point.• Key Type: The data encryption method used for this client.
System Configuration5-885CLI Commands for Displaying Station Status – To view status of clients currently associated with the access point, use the show station command from the Exec mode.Enterprise AP#show station 6-109Station Table Information===========================================================if-wireless G VAP [0]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.if-wireless G VAP [1]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.....No 802.11g Channel Stations.if-wireless g VAP [7]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.if-wireless G VAP [0]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.if-wireless G VAP [1]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.....No 802.11g Channel Stations.if-wireless G VAP [7]   :802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations.===========================================================Enterprise AP#
Status Information5-895Event LogsThe Event Logs window shows the log messages generated by the access point and stored in memory.The Event Logs table displays the following information:• Log Time: The time the log message was generated.• Event Level: The logging level associated with this message. For a description of the various levels, see “logging level” on page 5-32.• Event Message: The content of the log message.Error Messages – An example of a logged error message is: “Station Failed to authenticate (unsupported algorithm).”This message may be caused by any of the following conditions:• Access point was set to “Open Authentication”, but a client sent an authentication request frame with a “Shared key.”• Access point was set to “Shared Key Authentication,” but a client sent an authentication frame for “Open System.”• WEP keys do not match: When the access point uses “Shared Key Authentication,” but the key used by client and access point are not the same, the frame will be decrypted incorrectly, using the wrong algorithm and sequence number.CLI Commands for Displaying the Logging Status – From the global configuration mode, use the show logging command.Enterprise AP#show loggging 6-32Logging Information============================================Syslog State               : EnabledLogging Console State      : EnabledLogging Level              : AlertLogging Facility Type      : 16Servers   1: 192.168.1.19, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled   2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled=============================================Enterprise AP#
System Configuration5-905CLI Commands for Displaying Event Logs – To view the access point log entries, use the show event-log command from the Exec mode. To clear all log entries from the access point, use the logging clear command from the Global Configuration mode.Enterprise AP#show event-log 6-33Mar 09 11:57:55  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:57:55  Information: 802.11g:Radio channel updated to 8Mar 09 11:57:34  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:57:18  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:55:52  Information: SSH task: Set SSH server port to 22Mar 09 11:55:52  Information: SSH task: Enable SSH server.Mar 09 11:55:52  Information: Enable Telnet.Mar 09 11:55:40  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface DisabledMar 09 11:55:40  Information: 802.11g:Transmit Power set to QUARTERPress <n> next. <p> previous. <a> abort. <y> continue to end :Enterprise AP#configureEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CTRL/ZEnterprise AP(config)#logging clear 6-32Enterprise AP#
6-1Chapter 6: Command Line InterfaceUsing the Command Line InterfaceAccessing the CLIWhen accessing the management interface for the over a direct connection to the console port, or via a Telnet connection, the access point can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the access point’s command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.Console ConnectionTo access the access point through the console port, perform these steps:1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user name is “admin” and the default password is “smcadmin”) When the user name is entered, the CLI displays the “Enterprise AP#” prompt. 2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks. 3. When finished, exit the session with the “exit” command.After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:Caution:  The CLI examples shown later in this manual abbreviate the console prompt to just "AP." The console prompt can be configured using the "prompt" command (page 6-14).Telnet ConnectionTelnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion. For example, if the access point cannot acquire an IP address from a DHCP server, the default IP address used by the access point, 192.168.2.2, consists of a network portion (192.168.2) and a host portion (2).Username: adminPassword: Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-26To access the access point through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for the access point, and set the default gateway if you are managing the access point from a different IP subnet. For example:If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached.After you configure the access point with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps.1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access. 2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display the “Enterprise AP#” prompt to show that you are using executive access mode (i.e., Exec). 3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks. 4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command. After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:Caution:  You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.Entering CommandsThis section describes how to enter CLI commands.Keywords and ArgumentsA CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the command “show interfaces ethernet,” show and interfaces are keywords, and ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type.You can enter commands as follows:•  To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword. •  To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator, enter:Enterprise AP#configureEnterprise AP(config)#interface ethernetEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 10.1.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.1.0.254Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#Username: adminPassword: Enterprise AP#
Entering Commands6-36Enterprise AP(config)#username smithMinimum AbbreviationThe CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.Command CompletionIf you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “configure” example, typing con followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “configure.”Getting Help on CommandsYou can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command. You can also display command syntax by following a command with the “?” character to list keywords or parameters.Showing CommandsIf you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of keywords for the current configuration mode (Exec, Global Configuration, or Interface). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:The command “show interface ?” will display the following information:Enterprise AP#show ?  APmanagement    Show management AP information.  authentication  Show Authentication parameters  bootfile        Show bootfile name  bridge          Show bridge  config          System snapshot for tech support  dhcp-relay      Show DHCP Relay Configuration  event-log       Show event log on console  filters         Show filters  hardware        Show hardware version  history         Display the session history  interface       Show interface information  line            TTY line information  link-integrity  Show link integrity information  logging         Show the logging buffers  radius          Show radius server  rogue-ap        Show Rogue ap Stations  snmp            Show snmp configuration  sntp            Show sntp configuration  station         Show 802.11 station table  system          Show system information  version         Show system versionEnterprise AP#showEnterprise AP#show interface ?  ethernet  Show Ethernet interface  wireless  Show wireless interface  <cr>Enterprise AP#show interface
Command Line Interface6-46Partial Keyword LookupIf you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”Negating the Effect of CommandsFor many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands.Using Command HistoryThe CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then executed. Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands. Understanding Command ModesThe command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters. Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable certain functions. These classes are further divided into different modes. Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table:Enterprise AP#show s?snmp     sntp     station  systemEnterprise AP#show sClass ModeExec PrivilegedConfiguration GlobalInterface-ethernetInterface-wirelessInterface-wireless-vap
Entering Commands6-56Exec CommandsWhen you open a new console session on an access point, the system enters Exec command mode. Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You can access all other commands only from the configuration mode. To access Exec mode, open a new console session with the user name “admin.” The command prompt displays as “Enterprise AP#” for Exec mode. Configuration CommandsConfiguration commands are used to modify access point settings. These commands modify the running configuration and are saved in memory. The configuration commands are organized into four different modes:•  Global Configuration (GC) - These commands modify the system level configuration, and include commands such as username and password. •  Interface-Ethernet Configuration (IC-E) - These commands modify the Ethernet port configuration, and include command such as dns and ip.•  Interface-Wireless Configuration (IC-W) - These commands modify the wireless port configuration of global parameters for the radio, and include commands such as channel and transmit-power.•  Interface-Wireless Virtual Access Point Configuration (IC-W-VAP) - These commands modify the wireless port configuration for each VAP, and include commands such as ssid and authentication.To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Enterprise AP(config)#” which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.To enter Interface mode, you must enter the “interface ethernet,” or “interface wireless g” command while in Global Configuration mode. The system prompt will change to “Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#,” or Enterprise AP(if-wireless)” indicating that you have access privileges to the associated commands. You can use the end command to return to the Exec mode.Username: adminPassword: [system login password]Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#configureEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernetEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Command Line Interface6-66Command Line ProcessingCommands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command-line processing:Command GroupsThe system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.Table 6-1. Keystroke CommandsKeystroke FunctionCtrl-A Shifts cursor to start of command line. Ctrl-B Shifts cursor to the left one character.Ctrl-C Terminates a task and displays the command prompt.Ctrl-E Shifts cursor to end of command line.Ctrl-F Shifts cursor to the right one character.Ctrl-K Deletes from cursor to the end of the command line.Ctrl-L Repeats current command line on a new line.Ctrl-N Enters the next command line in the history buffer.Ctrl-P Shows the last command.Ctrl-R Repeats current command line on a new line.Ctrl-U  Deletes the entire line.Ctrl-W  Deletes the last word typed.Esc-B Moves the cursor backward one word.Esc-D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.Esc-F Moves the cursor forward one word.Delete key or backspace key  Erases a mistake when entering a command.Table 6-2. Command GroupsCommand Group Description PageGeneral Basic commands for entering configuration mode, restarting the system, or quitting the CLI  6-7System Management Controls user name, password, web browser management options, and a variety of other system information 6-11System Logging Configures system logging parameters 6-28System Clock Configures SNTP and system clock settings 6-33DHCP Relay Configures the access point to send DHCP requests from clients to specified servers 6-38
General Commands6-76The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations: Exec (Executive Mode), GC (Global Configuration), IC-E (Interface-Ethernet Configuration), IC-W (Interface-Wireless Configuration), and IC-W-VAP (Interface-Wireless VAP Configuration).General CommandsSNMP Configures community access strings and trap managers 6-40Flash/File Manages code image or access point configuration files  6-55RADIUS Configures the RADIUS client used with 802.1X authentication 6-58802.1X Authentication Configures 802.1X authentication 6-65MAC Address Authentication Configures MAC address authentication 6-70Filtering Filters communications between wireless clients, controls access to the management interface from wireless clients, and filters traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types6-73WDS Bridge Configures WDS forwarding table settings 6-77Spanning Tree Configures spanning tree parameters 6-83Ethernet Interface Configures connection parameters for the Ethernet interface 6-88Wireless Interface Configures radio interface settings 6-93Wireless Security Configures radio interface security and encryption settings 6-109Rogue AP Detection Configures settings for the detection of rogue access points in the network 6-109Link Integrity Configures a link check to a host device on the wired network 6-123IAPP Enables roaming between multi-vendor access points 6-127VLANs Configures VLAN membership  6-128WMM Configures WMM quality of service parameters 6-130Table 6-3. General CommandsCommand Function Mode Pageconfigure  Activates global configuration mode  Exec 6-8end  Returns to previous configuration mode  GC, IC 6-8exit  Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI  any 6-8ping  Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network  Exec 6-9reset  Restarts the system  Exec 6-10show history  Shows the command history buffer  Exec  6-10show line Shows the configuration settings for the console port Exec 6-11Table 6-2. Command GroupsCommand Group Description Page
Command Line Interface6-86configureThis command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to modify most of the settings on the access point. You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling the context modes for Interface Configuration. See “Using the Command Line Interface” on page 1.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecExample Related Commands end (6-8)endThis command returns to the previous configuration mode.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global Configuration, Interface ConfigurationExample This example shows how to return to the Configuration mode from the Interface Configuration mode:exitThis command returns to the Exec mode or exits the configuration program.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode AnyEnterprise AP#configureEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#endEnterprise AP(config)#
General Commands6-96Example This example shows how to return to the Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:pingThis command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.Syntax ping <host_name | ip_address> •host_name - Alias of the host. •ip_address - IP address of the host.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCommand Usage • Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached. • The following are some results of the ping command: -Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network traffic. -Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears in ten seconds. -Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable. -Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table. • Press <Esc> to stop pinging.Example Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#exitEnterprise AP#exitCLI session with the Access Point is now closedUsername:Enterprise AP#ping 10.1.0.19192.168.1.19 is aliveEnterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-106resetThis command restarts the system or restores the factory default settings.Syntax reset <board | configuration> •board - Reboots the system. •configuration - Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults, and then reboots the system.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCommand Usage When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. Example This example shows how to reset the system:show historyThis command shows the contents of the command history buffer.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCommand Usage • The history buffer size is fixed at 10 commands.• Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the commands in the history buffer.Example In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer:Enterprise AP#reset boardReboot system now? <y/n>: yEnterprise AP#show history config exit show historyEnterprise AP#
System Management Commands6-116show lineThis command displays the console port’s configuration settings.Command Mode ExecExampleThe console port settings are fixed at the values shown below.System Management CommandsThese commands are used to configure the user name, password, system logs, browser management options, clock settings, and a variety of other system information.Enterprise AP#show lineConsole Line Information======================================================  databits   : 8  parity     : none  speed      : 9600  stop bits  : 1======================================================Enterprise AP#Table 6-4. System Management CommandsCommand Function Mode PageCountry Settingcountry Sets the access point country code Exec 6-12Device Designationprompt Customizes the command line prompt  GC 6-14system name Specifies the host name for the access point GC 6-14snmp-server contact  Sets the system contact string GC 6-41snmp-server location  Sets the system location string  GC 6-42Management Access username Configures the user name for management access GC 6-15password  Specifies the password for management access GC 6-15ip ssh-server enable Enables the Secure Shell server IC-E 6-16ip ssh-server port Sets the Secure Shell port IC-E 6-16ip telnet-server enable Enables the Telnet server IC-E 6-17APmgmtIP Specifies an IP address or range of addresses allowed access to the management interface GC 6-21APmgmtUI Enables or disables SNMP, Telnet or web management access GC 6-22show APmanagement Shows the AP management configuration Exec 6-22
Command Line Interface6-126countryThis command configures the access point’s country code, which identifies the country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels. Syntax country <country_code>country_code - A two character code that identifies the country of operation. See the following table for a full list of codes.Web Serverip http port  Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface  GC 6-17ip http server  Allows the access point to be monitored or configured from a browser  GC 6-18ip https port Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP connection to the access point’s Web interface GC 6-18ip https server Enables the secure HTTP server on the access point  GC 6-19web-redirect Enables web authentication of clients using a public access Internet service GC 6-20System Statusshow system  Displays system information  Exec  6-23show version  Displays version information for the system  Exec  6-24show config Displays detailed configuration information for the system  Exec  6-24show hardware Displays the access point’s hardware version  Exec  6-28Table 6-5. Country CodesCountry Code Country Code Country Code Country CodeAlbania AL Dominican Republic DO Kuwait KW Romania ROAlgeria DZ Ecuador EC Latvia LV Russia RUArgentina AR Egypt EG Lebanon LB Saudi Arabia SAArmenia AM Estonia EE Liechtenstein LI Singapore SGAustralia AU Finland FI Lithuania LT Slovak Republic SKAustria AT France FR Macao MO Spain ESAzerbaijan AZ Georgia GE Macedonia MK Sweden SEBahrain BH Germany DE Malaysia MY Switzerland CHTable 6-4. System Management CommandsCommand Function Mode Page
System Management Commands6-136Default Setting US - for units sold in the United States99 (no country set) - for units sold in other countriesCommand Mode ExecBelarus BY Greece GR Malta MT Syria SYBelgium BE Guatemala GT Mexico MX Taiwan TWHonduras HN Monaco MC Thailand THBelize BZ Hong Kong  HK Morocco MA Trinidad & Tobago TTBolivia BO Hungary HU Netherlands NL Tunisia TNBrazil BR Iceland IS New Zealand NZ Turkey TRBrunei Darussalam BN India IN Norway NO Ukraine UABulgaria BG Indonesia ID Qatar QA United Arab Emirates AECanada CA Iran IR Oman OM United Kingdom GBChile CL Ireland IE Pakistan PK United States USChina CN Israel IL Panama PA Uruguay UYColombia CO Italy IT Peru PE Uzbekistan UZCosta Rica CR Japan JP Philippines PH Yemen YECroatia HR Jordan JO Poland PL Venezuela VECyprus CY Kazakhstan KZ Portugal PT Vietnam VNCzech Republic CZ North Korea KP Puerto Rico PR Zimbabwe ZWDenmark DK Korea Republic KR Slovenia SIElsalvador SV Luxembourg LU South Africa ZATable 6-5. Country CodesCountry Code Country Code Country Code Country Code
Command Line Interface6-146Command Usage• If you purchased an access point outside of the United States, the country code must be set before radio functions are enabled.• The available Country Code settings can be displayed by using the country ? command.Example promptThis command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default prompt.Syntax prompt <string>no promptstring - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum length: 32 characters)Default Setting Enterprise APCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample system nameThis command specifies or modifies the system name for this device. Use the no form to restore the default system name.Syntax system name <name>no system namename - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 32 characters)Default Setting Enterprise APEnterprise AP#country twEnterprise AP#Enterprise AP(config)#prompt RD2RD2(config)#
System Management Commands6-156Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample usernameThis command configures the user name for management access.Syntax username <name>name - The name of the user. (Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)Default Setting adminCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExamplepasswordAfter initially logging onto the system, you should set the password. Remember to record it in a safe place. Use the no form to reset the default password.Syntax password <password>no passwordpassword - Password for management access.(Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive) Default Setting smcadminCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample Enterprise AP(config)#system name APEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#username bobEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#password Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-166ip ssh-server enable This command enables the Secure Shell server. Use the no form to disable the server.Syntax ip ssh-server enableno ip ssh-serverDefault Setting Interface enabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Command Usage • The access point supports Secure Shell version 2.0 only.• After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated. The show system command displays the status of the SSH server.Exampleip ssh-server port This command sets the Secure Shell server port. Use the no form to disable the server.Syntax ip ssh-server port <port-number>•port-number - The UDP port used by the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535)Default Setting 22Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)ExampleEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server enableEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server port 1124Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
System Management Commands6-176ip telnet-server enable This command enables the Telnet server. Use the no form to disable the server.Syntax ip telnet-server enableno ip telnet-serverDefault Setting Interface enabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Exampleip http portThis command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface. Use the no form to use the default port.Syntax ip http port <port-number>no ip http portport-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface. (Range: 1024-65535)Default Setting 80Command Mode Global ConfigurationExampleRelated Commandsip http server (6-18)Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip telnet-server enableEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#Enterprise AP(config)#ip http port 769Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-186ip http serverThis command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use the no form to disable this function.Syntax ip http serverno ip http serverDefault Setting EnabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample Related Commandsip http port (6-17)ip https portUse this command to specify the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to the access point’s Web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.Syntax ip https port <port_number>no ip https portport_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL. (Range: 80, 1024-65535)Default Setting 443Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.• To avoid using common reserved TCP port numbers below 1024, the configurable range is restricted to 443 and between 1024 and 65535. • If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:https://device:port_numberEnterprise AP(config)#ip http serverEnterprise AP(config)#
System Management Commands6-196Example ip https serverUse this command to enable the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the access point’s Web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.Syntax ip https serverno ip https serverDefault Setting EnabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently.• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL: https://device:port_number]• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x.Example Enterprise AP(config)#ip https port 1234Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#ip https serverEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-206web-redirectUse this command to enable web-based authentication of clients. Use the no form to disable this function.Syntax [no] web-redirectDefault Setting DisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • The web redirect feature is used to support billing for a public access wireless network. After successful association to an access point, a client is “redirected” to an access point login web page as soon as Internet access is attempted. The client is then authenticated by entering a user name and password on the web page. This process allows controlled access for clients without requiring 802.1X or MAC authentication.• Web redirect requires a RADIUS server on the wired network with configured user names and passwords for authentication. The RADIUS server details must also be configured on the access point. (See “show bootfile” on page 6-58.)• Use the show system command to display the current web redirect status.Example Enterprise AP(config)#web-redirectEnterprise AP(config)#
System Management Commands6-216APmgmtIPThis command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the access point through various protocols.Caution:  Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings.SyntaxAPmgmtIP <multiple IP_address subnet_mask | single IP_address | any> •multiple - Adds IP addresses within a specifiable range to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.•single - Adds an IP address to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.•any - Allows any IP address access through SNMP, web and Telnet groups.•IP_address - Adds IP addresses to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.•subnet_mask - Specifies a range of IP addresses allowed management access.Default SettingAll addressesCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand Usage• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the access point from an invalid address, the unit will reject the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the access point will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the access point will accept overlapping address ranges.• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address.ExampleThis example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.168.1.50 255.255.255.0Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-226APmgmtUIThis command enables and disables management access to the access point through SNMP, Telnet and web interfaces.Caution:  Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings.SyntaxAPmgmtUI <[SNMP | Telnet | Web] enable | disable>•SNMP - Specifies SNMP management access.•Telnet - Specifies Telnet management access.•Web - Specifies web based management access.-enable/disable - Enables or disables the selected management access method.Default SettingAll enabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleThis example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.show apmagementThis command shows the AP management configuration, including the IP addresses of management stations allowed to access the access point, as well as the interface protocols which are open to management access.Command Mode ExecExampleEnterprise AP(config)#apmgmtui SNMP enableEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show apmagementManagement AP Information=================================AP Management IP Mode: Any IPTelnet UI: EnableWEB UI   : EnableSNMP UI  : Enable==================================Enterprise AP#
System Management Commands6-236show systemThis command displays basic system configuration settings.Default SettingNoneCommand Mode ExecExampleEnterprise AP#show systemSystem InformationSystem Information==============================================================Serial Number         :System Up time        : 0 days, 1 hours, 34 minutes, 38 secondsSystem Name           : Enterprise Wireless APSystem Location       :System Contact        : ContactSystem Country Code   : US - UNITED STATESMAC Address           : 00-13-F7-1C-33-66Radio A MAC Address   : 00-13-F7-1C-33-66Radio G MAC Address   : 00-13-F7-1C-33-67IP Address            : 192.168.2.2Subnet Mask           : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway       : 0.0.0.0VLAN State            : DISABLEDManagement VLAN ID(AP): 1IAPP State            : ENABLEDDHCP Client           : ENABLEDHTTP Server           : ENABLEDHTTP Server Port      : 80HTTP Session Timeout  : 300   sec(s)HTTPS Server          : ENABLEDHTTPS Server Port     : 443Slot Status           : Single band(a/g)Boot Rom Version      : v1.1.1Software Version      : v5.0.0.0SSH Server            : ENABLEDSSH Server Port       : 22Telnet Server         : ENABLEDWEB Redirect          : DISABLEDDHCP Relay            : DISABLED==============================================================Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-246show versionThis command displays the software version for the system.Command Mode ExecExample show configThis command displays detailed configuration information for the system.Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP#show versionVersion Information=========================================Software Version    : v5.0.0.0Date   : Feb  8 2006, 17:48:27BootRom Version    : v1.1.1Hardware version    : R0A=========================================Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show configAuthentication Information===========================================================MAC Authentication Server      : DISABLEDMAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min802.1x supplicant              : DISABLED802.1x supplicant user         : EMPTY802.1x supplicant password     : EMPTYAddress Filtering              : ALLOWEDSystem Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.Filter Table-----------------------------------------------------------No Filter Entries.Bootfile Information===================================Bootfile : smc-img.bin===================================Protocol Filter Information===========================================================Local Bridge         :DISABLEDAP Management        :ENABLEDEthernet Type Filter :DISABLEDEnabled Protocol Filters-----------------------------------------------------------No protocol filters are enabled===========================================================
System Management Commands6-256Hardware Version Information===========================================Hardware version R01A===========================================Ethernet Interface Information========================================IP Address          : 192.168.0.151Subnet Mask         : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway     : 192.168.0.1Primary DNS         : 210.200.211.225Secondary DNS       : 210.200.211.193Speed-duplex        : 100Base-TX Full DuplexAdmin status        : UpOperational status  : Up========================================Wireless Interface 802.11g Information===========================================================----------------Identification-----------------------------Description                : Enterprise 802.11g Access PointSSID                       : SMC_VAP_G 0Channel                    : 1 (AUTO)Antenna Mode               : FixedStatus                     : Enable----------------802.11 Parameters--------------------------Radio Mode                 : 802.11b+gTransmit Power             : 100% (16 dBm)Data Rate                  : 54MbpsFragmentation Threshold    : 2346 bytesRTS Threshold              : 2347 bytesBeacon Interval            : 100 TUsDTIM Interval              : 1 beaconMaximum Association        : 64 stationsNative VLAN ID             : 1----------------Security-----------------------------------Closed System              : DISABLEDMulticast cipher                : WEPUnicast cipher                  : TKIP and AESWPA clients                : REQUIREDWPA Key Mgmt Mode          : PRE SHARED KEYWPA PSK Key Type           : ALPHANUMERICEncryption                 : DISABLEDDefault Transmit Key       : 1Static Keys :    Key 1: EMPTY     Key 2: EMPTY     Key 3: EMPTY     Key 4: EMPTY  Key Length :    Key 1: ZERO      Key 2: ZERO      Key 3: ZERO      Key 4: ZERO   Authentication Type        : OPENRogue AP Detection         : DisabledRogue AP Scan Interval     : 720 minutesRogue AP Scan Duration     : 350 milliseconds===========================================================Console Line Information===========================================================  databits   : 8  parity     : none   speed      : 9600  stop bits  : 1===========================================================
Command Line Interface6-266Logging Information=====================================================Syslog State               : DisabledLogging Console State      : DisabledLogging Level              : InformationalLogging Facility Type      : 16Servers   1: 0.0.0.0        , UDP Port:  514, State: Disabled   2: 0.0.0.0        , UDP Port:  514, State: Disabled   3: 0.0.0.0        , UDP Port:  514, State: Disabled   4: 0.0.0.0        , UDP Port:  514, State: Disabled======================================================   Radius Server Information========================================IP                 : 0.0.0.0Port               : 1812Key                : *****Retransmit         : 3Timeout            : 5Radius MAC format  : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================Radius Secondary Server Information========================================IP                 : 0.0.0.0Port               : 1812Key                : *****Retransmit         : 3Timeout            : 5Radius MAC format  : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================SNMP Information==============================================Service State                 : DisableCommunity (ro)                : ********Community (rw)                : ********Location                      : Contact                       : ContactEngineId   :80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:29:f6:00:00:00:0cEngineBoots:2Trap Destinations:   1:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   2:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   3:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   4:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled
System Management Commands6-276      dot11InterfaceAGFail  Enabled          dot11InterfaceBFail  Enabled   dot11StationAssociation  Enabled   dot11StationAuthentication  Enabled dot11StationReAssociation  Enabled      dot11StationRequestFail  Enabled             dot1xAuthFail  Enabled        dot1xAuthNotInitiated  Enabled          dot1xAuthSuccess  Enabled         dot1xMacAddrAuthFail  Enabled   dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess  Enabled          iappContextDataSent  Enabled     iappStationRoamedFrom  Enabled          iappStationRoamedTo  Enabled      localMacAddrAuthFail  Enabled      localMacAddrAuthSuccess  Enabled              pppLogonFail  Enabled               sntpServerFail  Enabled  configFileVersionChanged  Enabled          radiusServerChanged  Enabled                systemDown  Enabled                     systemUp  Enabled=============================================SNTP Information===========================================================Service State        : DisabledSNTP (server 1) IP   : 137.92.140.80SNTP (server 2) IP   : 192.43.244.18Current Time         : 00 : 14, Jan 1st, 1970Time Zone            : -5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)Daylight Saving      : Disabled===========================================================Station Table Information===========================================================if-wireless G VAP [0]   : 802.11g Channel : AutoNo 802.11g Channel Stations....System Information==============================================================Serial Number         :  System Up time        : 0 days, 0 hours, 16 minutes, 51 secondsSystem Name           : SMCSystem Location       : System Contact        : ContactSystem Country Code   : 99 - NO_COUNTRY_SET MAC Address           : 00-12-CF-05-B7-84IP Address            : 192.168.0.151Subnet Mask           : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway       : 192.168.0.1VLAN State            : DISABLEDManagement VLAN ID(AP): 1IAPP State            : ENABLEDDHCP Client           : ENABLEDHTTP Server           : ENABLEDHTTP Server Port      : 80HTTPS Server          : ENABLEDHTTPS Server Port     : 443Slot Status           : Single band(a/g)Boot Rom Version      : v3.0.7Software Version      : v5.0.0.0
Command Line Interface6-286show hardwareThis command displays the hardware version of the system.Command Mode ExecExample System Logging CommandsThese commands are used to configure system logging on the access point.SSH Server            : ENABLEDSSH Server Port       : 22Telnet Server         : ENABLEDWEB Redirect          : DISABLEDDHCP Relay            : DISABLED==============================================================Version Information=========================================Version: v4.3.2.2Date   : Dec 20 2005, 18:38:12=========================================Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show hardwareHardware Version Information===========================================Hardware version R01===========================================Enterprise AP#Table 6-6. System Logging CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagelogging on  Controls logging of error messages GC 6-29logging  host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages  GC 6-29logging console Initiates logging of error messages to the console GC 6-30logging level Defines the minimum severity level for event logging GC 6-30logging facility-type Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages  GC 6-31logging clear Clears all log entries in access point memory GC 6-32show logging  Displays the state of logging Exec 6-32show event-log Displays all log entries in access point memory Exec 6-33
System Logging Commands6-296logging onThis command controls logging of error messages; i.e., sending debug or error messages to memory. The no form disables the logging process.Syntax[no] logging onDefault SettingDisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to memory. You can use the logging level command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory. Example logging hostThis command specifies syslog servers host that will receive logging messages. Use the no form to remove syslog server host.Syntaxlogging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4> <host_name | host_ip_address> [udp_port]no logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>•1 - First syslog server.•2 - Second syslog server.•3 - Third syslog server.•4 - Fourth syslog server.•host_name - The name of a syslog server. (Range: 1-20 characters)•host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.•udp_port - The UDP port used by the syslog server.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationEnterprise AP(config)#logging onEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-306Example logging consoleThis command initiates logging of error messages to the console. Use the no form to disable logging to the console.Syntaxlogging consoleno logging consoleDefault Setting DisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample logging levelThis command sets the minimum severity level for event logging.Syntaxlogging level <Emergency | Alert | Critical | Error | Warning | Notice | Informational | Debug>Default Setting InformationalCommand Mode Global ConfigurationEnterprise AP(config)#logging host 1 10.1.0.3Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#logging consoleEnterprise AP(config)#
System Logging Commands6-316Command Usage Messages sent include the selected level down to Emergency level.Example logging facility-typeThis command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.Syntaxlogging facility-type <type>type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)Default Setting 16Command Mode Global ConfigurationLevel Argument DescriptionEmergency System unusableAlert Immediate action neededCritical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)Error Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)Warning Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)Notice Normal but significant condition, such as cold start Informational Informational messages onlyDebug Debugging messagesEnterprise AP(config)#logging level alertEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-326Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the access point. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database.Example logging clearThis command clears all log messages stored in the access point’s memory.Syntaxlogging clearCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample show loggingThis command displays the logging configuration.Syntaxshow loggingCommand Mode ExecExampleEnterprise AP(config)#logging facility 19Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#logging clearEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show loggingLogging Information============================================Syslog State               : EnabledLogging Console State      : EnabledLogging Level              : AlertLogging Facility Type      : 16Servers   1: 192.168.1.19, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled   2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled   4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled=============================================Enterprise AP#
System Clock Commands6-336show event-logThis command displays log messages stored in the access point’s memory.Syntaxshow event-logCommand Mode ExecExampleSystem Clock CommandsThese commands are used to configure SNTP and system clock settings on the access point.Enterprise AP#show event-logMar 09 11:57:55  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:57:55  Information: 802.11g:Radio channel updated to 8Mar 09 11:57:34  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:57:18  Information: 802.11g:11g Radio Interface EnabledMar 09 11:55:52  Information: SSH task: Set SSH server port to 22Mar 09 11:55:52  Information: SSH task: Enable SSH server.Mar 09 11:55:52  Information: Enable Telnet.Mar 09 11:55:40  Information: 802.11g:Transmit Power set to QUARTERPress <n> next. <p> previous. <a> abort. <y> continue to end :Enterprise AP#configureEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CTRL/ZEnterprise AP(config)#logging clearTable 6-7. System Clock CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagesntp-server ip Specifies one or more time servers GC 6-34sntp-server enable  Accepts time from the specified time servers GC 6-34sntp-server date-time Manually sets the system date and time GC 6-35sntp-server daylight-saving Sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time GC 6-36sntp-server timezone Sets the time zone for the access point’s internal clock GC 6-36show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings Exec  6-37
Command Line Interface6-346sntp-server ipThis command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list.Syntaxsntp-server ip <1 | 2> <ip>•1 - First time server.•2 - Second time server.•ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP). Default Setting 137.92.140.80192.43.244.18Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage When SNTP client mode is enabled using the sntp-server enable command, the sntp-server ip command specifies the time servers from which the access point polls for time updates. The access point will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received. Example Related Commandssntp-server enable (6-34)show sntp (6-37)sntp-server enableThis command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization with NTP or SNTP time servers specified by the sntp-server ip command. Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests.Syntaxsntp-server enable no sntp-server enable Default Setting EnabledEnterprise AP(config)#sntp-server ip 10.1.0.19Enterprise AP#
System Clock Commands6-356Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events. Without SNTP, the access point only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:14:00, January 1, 1970).Example Related Commandssntp-server ip (6-34)show sntp (6-37)sntp-server date-timeThis command sets the system clock.Default Setting 00:14:00, January 1, 1970Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample This example sets the system clock to 17:37 June 19, 2003.Related Commandssntp-server enable (6-34)Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server enableEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server date-timeEnter Year<1970-2100>: 2003Enter Month<1-12>: 6Enter Day<1-31>: 19Enter Hour<0-23>: 17Enter Min<0-59>: 37Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-366sntp-server daylight-savingThis command sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time. Use the no form to disable daylight savings time.Syntaxsntp-server daylight-saving no sntp-server daylight-saving Default Setting DisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage The command sets the system clock back one hour during the specified period.Example This sets daylight savings time to be used from July 1st to September 1st.sntp-server timezoneThis command sets the time zone for the access point’s internal clock.Syntaxsntp-server timezone <hours>hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: -12 to +12 hours)Default Setting -5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)Command Mode Global ConfigurationEnterprise AP(config)#sntp-server daylight-savingEnter Daylight saving from which month<1-12>: 6and which day<1-31>: 1Enter Daylight saving end to which month<1-12>: 9and which day<1-31>: 1Enterprise AP(config)#
System Clock Commands6-376Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.Example show sntpThis command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client.Command ModeExecExample Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server timezone +8Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show sntpSNTP Information=========================================================Service State        : EnabledSNTP (server 1) IP   : 137.92.140.80SNTP (server 2) IP   : 192.43.244.18Current Time         : 08 : 04, Jun 20th, 2006Time Zone            : +8 (TAIPEI, BEIJING)Daylight Saving      : Enabled, from Jun, 1st to Sep, 1st=========================================================Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-386DHCP Relay CommandsDynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an IP address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a request. To receive the broadcast request, the DHCP server would normally have to be on the same subnet as the client. However, when the access point’s DHCP relay agent is enabled, received client requests can be forwarded directly by the access point to a known DHCP server on another subnet. Responses from the DHCP server are returned to the access point, which then broadcasts them back to clients.dhcp-relay enableThis command enables the access point’s DHCP relay agent. Use the no form to disable the agent.Syntax[no] dhcp-relay enableDefault Setting DisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • For the DHCP relay agent to function, the primary DHCP server must be configured using the dhcp-relay primary command. A secondary DHCP server does not need to be configured, but it is recommended.• If there is no response from the primary DHCP server, and a secondary server has been configured, the agent will then attempt to send DHCP requests to the secondary server.Example Table 6-8. DHCP Relay CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagedhcp-relay enable Enables the DHCP relay agent GC 6-38dhcp-relay Sets the primary and secondary DHCP server address GC 6-39show dhcp-relay Shows current DHCP relay configuration settings Exec  6-39Enterprise AP(config)#dhcp-relay enableEnterprise AP(config)#
DHCP Relay Commands6-396dhcp-relayThis command configures the primary and secondary DHCP server addresses.Syntaxdhcp-relay <primary | secondary> <ip_address>•primary - The primary DHCP server.•secondary - The secondary DHCP server.•ip_address - IP address of the server.Default Setting Primary and secondary: 0.0.0.0Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample show dhcp-relayThis command displays the current DHCP relay configuration.Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP(config)#dhcp-relay primary 192.168.1.10Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show dhcp-relayDHCP Relay            : ENABLEDPrimary DHCP Server   : 192.168.1.10Secondary DHCP Server : 0.0.0.0Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-406SNMP CommandsControls access to this access point from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages.Table 6-9. SNMP CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagesnmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to SNMP commands  GC 6-41snmp-server contact  Sets the system contact string GC 6-41snmp-server location  Sets the system location string  GC 6-42snmp-server enable server  Enables SNMP service and traps GC 6-42snmp-server host  Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation  GC 6-43snmp-server trap Enables specific SNMP notifications GC 6-44snmp-server engine id Sets the engine ID for SNMP v3 GC 6-46snmp-server user Sets the name of the SNMP v3 user GC 6-46snmp-server targets Configures SNMP v3 notification targets GC 6-48snmp-server filter Configures SNMP v3 notification filters GC 6-49snmp-server filter-assignments Assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets GC 6-50show snmp groups Displays the pre-defined SNMP v3 groups Exec 6-50show snmp users Displays SNMP v3 user settings Exec 6-51show snmp group-assignments Displays the assignment of users to SNMP v3 groups Exec 6-51show snmp target Displays the SNMP v3 notification targets Exec 6-52show snmp filter Displays the SNMP v3 notification filters Exec 6-52show snmp filter-assignments Displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments Exec 6-53show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications Exec  6-54
SNMP Commands6-416snmp-server communityThis command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string.Syntaxsnmp-server community string [ro | rw]no snmp-server community string•string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive)•ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects. •rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.Default Setting • public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage If you enter a community string without the ro or rw option, the default is read only.Example snmp-server contactThis command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the system contact information.Syntaxsnmp-server contact stringno snmp-server contactstring - String that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255 characters)Default Setting NoneEnterprise AP(config)#snmp-server community alpha rwEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-426Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample Related Commandssnmp-server location (6-42)snmp-server locationThis command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the location string.Syntaxsnmp-server location <text>no snmp-server locationtext - String that describes the system location. (Maximum length: 255 characters)Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample Related Commandssnmp-server contact (6-41)snmp-server enable serverThis command enables SNMP management access and also enables this device to send SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP service and trap messages.Syntax snmp-server enable serverno snmp-server enable serverDefault Setting EnabledEnterprise AP(config)#snmp-server contact PaulEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server location WC-19Enterprise AP(config)#
SNMP Commands6-436Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • This command enables both authentication failure notifications and link-up-down notifications. •The snmp-server host command specifies the host device that will receive SNMP notifications. Example Related Commandssnmp-server host (6-43)snmp-server host This command specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification. Use the no form to remove the specified host.Syntaxsnmp-server host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4> <host_ip_address | host_name> <community-string>no snmp-server host•1 - First SNMP host.•2 - Second SNMP host.•3 - Third SNMP host.•4 - Fourth SNMP host.•host_ip_address - IP of the host (the targeted recipient). •host_name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-63 characters)•community-string - Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. Although you can set this string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 23 characters)Default Setting Host Address: NoneCommunity String: publicCommand Mode Global ConfigurationEnterprise AP(config)#snmp-server enable serverEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-446Command Usage The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable server command to enable SNMP notifications. Example Related Commandssnmp-server enable server (6-42)snmp-server trapThis command enables the access point to send specific SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable specific trap messages.Syntaxsnmp-server trap <trap>no snmp-server trap <trap>•trap - One of the following SNMP trap messages:-sysSystemUp - The access point is up and running.-sysSystemDown - The access point is about to shutdown and reboot.-sysRadiusServerChanged - The access point has changed from the primary RADIUS server to the secondary, or from the secondary to the primary.-sysConfigFileVersionChanged - The access point’s configuration file has been changed.-dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated with the access point.-dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully re-associated with the access point.-dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully authenticated.-dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association, re-association, or authentication.-dot11InterfaceBFail - The 802.11b interface has failed.-dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the RADIUS server.-dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address authentication with the RADIUS server.-dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X authentication.-dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server host 1 10.1.19.23 batmanEnterprise AP(config)#
SNMP Commands6-456-dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication.-dot1xSuppAuthenticated - A supplicant station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server-localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the local database on the access point.-localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with the local MAC address database on the access point.-iappStationRoamedFrom - A client station has roamed from another access point (identified by its IP address).-iappStationRoamedTo - A client station has roamed to another access point (identified by its IP address).-iappContextDataSent - A client station’s Context Data has been sent to another access point with which the station has associated.-sntpServerFail - The access point has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP server.-wirelessExternalAntenna - An external antenna has been enabled.-dot11WirelessStationDeauthenticate - A client station has de-authenticated from the network.-dot11StationDisassociate - A client station no longer associates with the network.-dot11StationAuthenticateFail - A client station has tried and failed to authenticate to the network.Default Setting All traps enabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host and snmp-server enable server commands to enable SNMP notifications.Example Enterprise AP(config)#no snmp-server trap dot11StationAssociationEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-466snmp-server engine-idThis command is used for SNMP v3. It is used to uniquely identify the access point among all access points in the network. Use the no form to delete the engine ID.Syntax snmp-server engine-id <engine-id> no snmp-server engine-id engine-id - Enter engine-id in hexadecimal (5-32 characters). Default Setting EnabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server user command. • Entering this command invalidates all engine IDs that have been previously configured. • If the engineID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing usersExample snmp-server userThis command configures the SNMP v3 users that are allowed to manage the access point. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 user.Syntaxsnmp-server user <user-name>user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters maximum)Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • Up to 10 SNMPv3 users can be configured on the access point.Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server engine-id 1a:2b:3c:4d:00:ffEnterprise AP(config)#
SNMP Commands6-476• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests from the pass phrase. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.• The access point enables SNMP v3 users to be assigned to three pre-defined groups. Other groups cannot be defined. The available groups are:- RO - A read-only group using no authentication and no data encryption. Users in this group use no security, either authentication or encryption, in SNMP messages they send to the agent. This is the same as SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c.- RWAuth - A read/write group using authentication, but no data encryption. Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password for authentication, but not a DES key/password for encryption.- RWPriv - A read/write group using authentication and data encryption. Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password for authentication and a DES key/password for encryption. Both the MD5 and DES key/passwords must be defined.• The command prompts for the following information to configure an SNMP v3 user:-user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters maximum)-group-name - The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned (32 characters maximum). There are three pre-defined groups: RO, RWAuth, or RWPriv.-auth-proto - The authentication type used for user authentication: md5 or none.-auth-passphrase - The user password required when authentication is used (8 – 32 characters).-priv-proto - The encryption type used for SNMP data encryption: des or none.-priv-passphrase - The user password required when data encryption is used (8 – 32 characters).• Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. If a user who has “AuthPriv” security (uses authentication and encryption) is assigned to a read-only (RO) group, the user will not be able to access the database. An AuthPriv user must be assigned to the RWPriv group with the AuthPriv security level.• To configure a user for the RWAuth group, you must include the auth-proto and auth-passphrase keywords.• To configure a user for the RWPriv group, you must include the auth-proto, auth-passphrase, priv-proto, and priv-passphrase keywords.
Command Line Interface6-486Example snmp-server targetsThis command configures SNMP v3 notification targets. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 target.Syntaxsnmp-server targets <target-id> <ip-addr> <sec-name>   [version {3}] [udp-port {port-number}] [notification-type   {TRAP}]no snmp-server targets <target-id>•target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications. (Maximum length: 32 characters)•ip-addr - Specifies the IP address of the management station to receive notifications.•sec-name -  The defined SNMP v3 user name that is to receive notifications.•version - The SNMP version of notifications. Currently only version 3 is supported in this command.•udp-port - The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notifications.•notification-type - The type of notification that is sent. Currently only TRAP is supported.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • The access point supports up to 10 SNMP v3 target IDs.• The SNMP v3 user name that is specified in the target must first be configured using the snmp-server user command.Example Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server user User Name<1-32> :chrisGroup Name<1-32> :RWPrivAuthtype(md5,<cr>none):md5Passphrase<8-32>:a good secretPrivacy(des,<cr>none) :desPassphrase<8-32>:a very good secretEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server targets mytraps 192.168.1.33 chrisEnterprise AP(config)#
SNMP Commands6-496snmp-server filterThis command configures SNMP v3 notification filters. Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 filter or remove a subtree from a filter.Syntaxsnmp-server filter <filter-id> <include | exclude> <subtree>   [mask {mask}]no snmp-server filter <filter-id> [subtree]•filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)•include - Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree.•exclude - Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree.•subtree - The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered.•mask - An optional hexadecimal value bit mask to define objects in the MIB subtree. Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • The access point allows up to 10 notification filters to be created. Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries.• Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined.• The MIB subtree must be defined in the form “.1.3.6.1” and always start with a “.”.• The mask is a hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding ID in the MIB subtree. A “1” in the mask indicates an exact match and a “0” indicates a “wild card.” For example, a mask value of 0xFFBF provides a bit mask “1111 1111 1011 1111.” If applied to the subtree 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23, the zero corresponds to the 10th subtree ID. When there are more subtree IDs than bits in the mask, the mask is padded with ones.Example Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter include .1Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23
Command Line Interface6-506snmp-server filter-assignmentsThis command assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets. Use the no form to remove an SNMP v3 filter assignment.Syntaxsnmp-server filter-assignments <target-id> <filter-id> no snmp-server filter-assignments <target-id> •target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications. (Maximum length: 32 characters)•filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample show snmp groupsThis command displays the SNMP v3 pre-defined groups.Syntax show snmp groupsCommand ModeExecEnterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter-assignments mytraps trapfilterEnterprise AP(config)#exitEnterprise AP#show snmp targetHost ID      : mytrapsUser         : chrisIP Address   : 192.168.1.33UDP Port     : 162=============================Enterprise AP#show snmp filter-assignments                             HostID  FilterID                            mytraps  trapfilterEnterprise AP(config)#
SNMP Commands6-516Example show snmp usersThis command displays the SNMP v3 users and settings.Syntax show snmp usersCommand ModeExecExample show snmp group-assignmentsThis command displays the SNMP v3 user group assignments.Syntax show snmp group-assignmentsCommand ModeExecEnterprise AP#show snmp groupsGroupName     :ROSecurityModel :USMSecurityLevel :NoAuthNoPrivGroupName     :RWAuthSecurityModel :USMSecurityLevel :AuthNoPrivGroupName     :RWPrivSecurityModel :USMSecurityLevel :AuthPrivEnterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show snmp users=============================================UserName     :chrisGroupName    :RWPrivAuthType     :MD5   Passphrase:****************PrivType     :DES   Passphrase:****************=============================================Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-526Example show snmp targetThis command displays the SNMP v3 notification target settings.Syntaxshow snmp targetCommand Mode ExecExample show snmp filterThis command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter settings.Syntaxshow snmp filter [filter-id] •filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32 characters)Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP#show snmp group-assignmentsGroupName    :RWPrivUserName     :chrisEnterprise AP#Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show snmp targetHost ID      : mytrapsUser         : chrisIP Address   : 192.168.1.33UDP Port     : 162=============================Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show snmp filterFilter: trapfilter     Type: include  Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1     Type: exclude  Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23=============================Enterprise AP#
SNMP Commands6-536show snmp filter-assignmentsThis command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments.Syntaxshow snmp filter-assignmentsCommand Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP#show snmp filter-assignments                             HostID  FilterID                            mytraps  trapfilterEnterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-546show snmpThis command displays the SNMP configuration settings.Command Mode ExecExampleEnterprise AP#show snmpSNMP Information==============================================Service State                 : DisableCommunity (ro)                : ********Community (rw)                : ********Location                      : R&D 2Contact                       : DavidEngineId   :80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:27:04:00:00:00:08EngineBoots:3Trap Destinations:   1:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   2:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   3:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled   4:          0.0.0.0, Community: *****, State: Disabled                  systemUp  Enabled                   systemDown  Enabled       radiusServerChanged  Enabled     configFileVersionChanged  Enabled            sntpServerFail  Enabled      dot11StationAssociation  Enabled dot11StationReAssociation  Enabled   dot11StationAuthentication  Enabled   dot11StationRequestFail  Enabled      dot1XMacAddrAuthSuccess  Enabled      dot1XMacAddrAuthFail  Enabled        dot1XAuthNotInitiated  Enabled          dot1XAuthSuccess  Enabled                dot1XAuthFail  Enabled   localMacAddrAuthSuccess  Enabled         localMacAddrAuthFail  Enabled     iappStationRoamedFrom  Enabled          iappStationRoamedTo  Enabled       iappContextDataSent  Enabled       dot1XSuppAuthenticated  Enabled   wirelessExternalAntenna  Enabled          dot11InterfaceAFail  Enabled       dot11InterfaceGFail  Enabled=============================================Enterprise AP#
Flash/File Commands6-556Flash/File CommandsThese commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.bootfileThis command specifies the image used to start up the system.Syntaxbootfile <filename>filename - Name of the image file.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCommand Usage • The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file. ExampleTable 6-10. Flash/File CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagebootfile Specifies the file or image used to start up the system  GC 6-55copy  Copies a code image or configuration between flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server Exec 6-56delete  Deletes a file or code image  Exec 6-57dir  Displays a list of files in flash memory  Exec 6-58show bootfile Displays the name of the current operation code file thatbooted the systemExec 6-58Enterprise AP#bootfile -img.binEnterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-566copy This command copies a boot file, code image, or configuration file between the access point’s flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server. When you save the configuration settings to a file on a FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the access point to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of the network connection. Syntaxcopy <ftp | tftp> filecopy config <ftp | tftp>•ftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from an FTP server.•tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.•file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a flash memory file. •config - Keyword that allows you to upload the configuration file from flash memory. Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCommand Usage • The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command. • Only a configuration file can be uploaded to an FTP/TFTP server, but every type of file can be downloaded to the access point.•The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the access point supports only two operation code files.• The system configuration file must be named “syscfg” in all copy commands.Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server:Enterprise AP#copy config tftpTFTP Source file name:syscfgTFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19Enterprise AP#
Flash/File Commands6-576The following example shows how to download a configuration file: deleteThis command deletes a file or image.Syntaxdelete <filename>filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode ExecCaution:  Beware of deleting application images from flash memory. At least one application image is required in order to boot the access point. If there are multiple image files in flash memory, and the one used to boot the access point is deleted, be sure you first use the bootfile command to update the application image file booted at startup before you reboot the access point.Example This example shows how to delete the test.cfg configuration file from flash memory.Related Commandsbootfile (6-55)dir (6-58)Enterprise AP#copy tftp file1. Application image2. Config file3. Boot block imageSelect the type of download<1,2,3>:  [1]:2TFTP Source file name:syscfgTFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#delete test.cfgAre you sure you wish to delete this file? <y/n>:Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-586dirThis command displays a list of files in flash memory.Command Mode ExecCommand Usage File information is shown below:Example The following example shows how to display all file information:show bootfileThis command displays the name of the current operation code file that booted the system.Syntaxshow snmp filter-assignmentsCommand Mode ExecExample Column Heading DescriptionFile Name The name of the file.Type (2) Operation Code and (5) Configuration fileFile Size The length of the file in bytes.Enterprise AP#dirFile Name                     File Size(Bytes)--------------------------    ----------------syscfg_bak                    53710syscfg                        53710smc-img.bin                   2499148     858112 bytes availableEnterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show bootfileBootfile Information===================================Bootfile : smc-img.bin===================================Enterprise AP#
RADIUS Client6-596RADIUS ClientRemote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access for RADIUS-aware devices to the network. An authentication server contains a database of credentials, such as users names and passwords, for each wireless client that requires access to the access point.radius-server addressThis command specifies the primary and secondary RADIUS servers. Syntaxradius-server [secondary] address <host_ip_address | host_name>•secondary - Secondary server.•host_ip_address - IP address of server.•host_name - Host name of server. (Range: 1-20 characters)Default Setting NoneTable 6-11. RADIUS ClientCommand Function Mode Pageradius-server address Specifies the RADIUS server  GC 6-59radius-server port  Sets the RADIUS server network port  GC 6-60radius-server key  Sets the RADIUS encryption key  GC 6-60radius-server retransmit  Sets the number of retries  GC 6-61radius-server timeout  Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 6-61radius-server port-accounting  Sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port GC 6-62radius-server timeout-interim Sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server GC 6-62radius-server radius-mac-format Sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the RADIUS server GC 6-63radius-server vlan-format Sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server GC 6-63show radius Shows the current RADIUS settings Exec 6-64
Command Line Interface6-606Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample radius-server portThis command sets the RADIUS server network port. Syntaxradius-server [secondary] port <port_number>•secondary - Secondary server.•port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1024-65535)Default Setting 1812Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample radius-server keyThis command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Syntax radius-server [secondary] key <key_string>•secondary - Secondary server.•key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)Default Setting DEFAULTCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server address 192.168.1.25Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port 181Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server key greenEnterprise AP(config)#
RADIUS Client6-616radius-server retransmitThis command sets the number of retries. Syntaxradius-server [secondary] retransmit number_of_retries•secondary - Secondary server.•number_of_retries - Number of times the access point will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)Default Setting 3Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample radius-server timeoutThis command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server. Syntax radius-server [secondary] timeout number_of_seconds•secondary - Secondary server.•number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the access point waits for a reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-60)Default Setting 5Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server retransmit 5Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout 10Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-626radius-server port-accountingThis command sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port. Syntaxradius-server [secondary] port-accounting <port_number>•secondary - Secondary server. If secondary is not specified, then the access point assumes you are configuring the primary RADIUS server.•port_number - RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting messages. (Range: 0 or 1024-65535)Default Setting 0 (disabled)Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP port is specified, a RADIUS accounting session is automatically started for each user that is successfully authenticated to the access point.Example radius-server timeout-interimThis command sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server.Syntax radius-server [secondary] timeout-interim <number_of_seconds>•secondary - Secondary server.•number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the access point waits between transmitting accounting updates. (Range: 60-86400)Default Setting 3600Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • The access point sends periodic accounting updates after every interim period until the user logs off and a “stop” message is sent.Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port-accounting 1813Enterprise AP(config)#
RADIUS Client6-636Example radius-server radius-mac-formatThis command sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the RADIUS server.Syntaxradius-server radius-mac-format <multi-colon | multi-dash | no-delimiter | single-dash>•multi-colon - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.•multi-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.•no-delimiter - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxxxxxxxx.•single-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxx-xxxxxx.Default SettingNo delimiterCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExample radius-server vlan-formatThis command sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server.Syntaxradius-server vlan-format <hex | ascii>•hex - Enter VLAN IDs as a hexadecimal number.•ascii - Enter VLAN IDs as an ASCII string.Default SettingHexCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExample Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout-interim 500Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server radius-mac-format multi-dashEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server vlan-format asciiEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-646show radiusThis command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.Default SettingNoneCommand Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP#show radiusRadius Server Information========================================Status          : DisabledIP              : 0.0.0.0Port            : 1812Key             : *****Retransmit      : 3Timeout         : 5Accounting Port : 0  (Disabled)InterimUpdate   : 3600Accounting Server State : DOWNRadius MAC format : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================Radius Secondary Server Information========================================Status          : DisabledIP              : 0.0.0.0Port            : 1812Key             : *****Retransmit      : 3Timeout         : 5Accounting Port : 0  (Disabled)InterimUpdate   : 3600Accounting Server State : DOWNRadius MAC format : no-delimiterRadius VLAN format : HEX========================================Enterprise AP#
802.1X Authentication6-656802.1X AuthenticationThe access point supports IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients. This control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X client application to submit user credentials for authentication. Client authentication is then verified by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) before the access point grants client access to the network. The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients.802.1xThis command configures 802.1X as optionally supported or as required for wireless clients. Use the no form to disable 802.1X support.Syntax802.1x <supported | required>no 802.1x•supported - Authenticates clients that initiate the 802.1X authentication process. Uses standard 802.11 authentication for all others.•required - Requires 802.1X authentication for all clients.Default SettingDisabledTable 6-12. 802.1X AuthenticationCommand Function Mode Page802.1x Configures 802.1X as disabled, supported, or required IC-W-VAP 6-65802.1x broadcast-key- refresh-rate Sets the interval at which the primary broadcast keys are refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying IC-W-VAP 6-66802.1x session-key- refresh-rate  Sets the interval at which unicast session keys are refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying IC-W-VAP 6-67802.1x session-timeout Sets the timeout after which a connected client must be re-authenticated IC-W-VAP 6-67802.1x-supplicant enable Enables the access point to operate as a 802.1X supplicant GC 6-68802.1x-supplicant user Sets the supplicant user name and password for the access point GC 6-68show authentication Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the address filter table Exec 6-68
Command Line Interface6-666Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand Usage• When 802.1X is disabled, the access point does not support 802.1X authentication for any station. After successful 802.11 association, each client is allowed to access the network.• When 802.1X is supported, the access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does NOT initiate 802.1X authentication). For stations initiating 802.1X, only those stations successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those stations not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful 802.11 association.• When 802.1X is required, the access point enforces 802.1X authentication for all 802.11 associated stations. If 802.1X authentication is not initiated by the station, the access point will initiate authentication. Only those stations successfully authenticated with 802.1X are allowed to access the network.• 802.1X does not apply to the 10/100Base-TX port.Example802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rateThis command sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying. Syntax802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rate <rate>rate - The interval at which the access point rotates broadcast keys. (Range: 0 - 1440 minutes)Default Setting0 (Disabled)Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand Usage• The access point uses Enterprise APOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LANs) packets to pass dynamic unicast session and broadcast keys to wireless clients. The 802.1x broadcast-key-refresh-rate command specifies the interval after which the broadcast keys are changed. The 802.1x session-key-refresh-rate Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x supportedEnterprise AP(config)#
802.1X Authentication6-676command specifies the interval after which unicast session keys are changed.• Dynamic broadcast key rotation allows the access point to generate a random group key and periodically update all key-management capable wireless clients.Example802.1x session-key-refresh-rateThis command sets the interval at which unicast session keys are refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying.Syntax802.1x session-key-refresh-rate <rate>rate - The interval at which the access point refreshes a session key. (Range: 0 - 1440 minutes)Default Setting0 (Disabled)Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageSession keys are unique to each client, and are used to authenticate a client connection, and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point.Example802.1x session-timeoutThis command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. Use the no form to disable 802.1X re-authentication.Syntax802.1x session-timeout <seconds>no 802.1x session-timeoutseconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 0-65535)Default0 (Disabled)Enterprise AP(config)#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x session-key-refresh-rate 5Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-686Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationExample802.1x-supplicant enableThis command enables the access point to operate as an 802.1X supplicant for authentication. Use the no form to disable 802.1X authentication of the access point.Syntax802.1x-supplicant enableno 802.1x-supplicantDefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageA user name and password must be configured first before the 802.1X supplicant feature can be enabled.Example802.1x-supplicant userThis command sets the user name and password used for authentication of the access point when operating as a 802.1X supplicant. Use the no form to clear the supplicant user name and password.Syntax802.1x-supplicant user <username> <password>no 802.1x-supplicant user•username - The access point name used for authentication to the network. (Range: 1-32 alphanumeric characters)•password - The MD5 password used for access point authentication. (Range: 1-32 alphanumeric characters)DefaultNoneEnterprise AP(config)#802.1x session-timeout 300Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x-supplicant enableEnterprise AP(config)#
802.1X Authentication6-696Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageThe access point currently only supports EAP-MD5 CHAP for 802.1X supplicant authentication.Exampleshow authenticationThis command shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the address filter table.Command ModeExecExampleEnterprise AP(config)#802.1x-supplicant user WA6102 dot1xpassEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show authenticationAuthentication Information===========================================================MAC Authentication Server      : DISABLEDMAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min802.1x supplicant              : DISABLED802.1x supplicant user         : EMPTY802.1x supplicant password     : EMPTYAddress Filtering              : ALLOWEDSystem Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.Filter TableMAC Address             Status-----------------       ----------00-70-50-cc-99-1a       DENIED00-70-50-cc-99-1b       ALLOWED=========================================================Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-706MAC Address Authentication Use these commands to define MAC authentication on the access point. For local MAC authentication, first define the default filtering policy using the address filter default command. Then enter the MAC addresses to be filtered, indicating if they are allowed or denied. For RADIUS MAC authentication, the MAC addresses and filtering policy must be configured on the RADIUS server.address filter defaultThis command sets filtering to allow or deny listed MAC addresses.Syntaxaddress filter default <allowed | denied>•allowed - Only MAC addresses entered as “denied” in the address filtering table are denied.•denied - Only MAC addresses entered as “allowed” in the address filtering table are allowed.DefaultallowedCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleTable 6-13. MAC Address AuthenticationCommand Function Mode Pageaddress filter default Sets filtering to allow or deny listed addresses GC 6-70address filter entry Enters a MAC address in the filter table GC 6-71address filter delete Removes a MAC address from the filter table GC 6-71mac- authentication server Sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options GC 6-72mac- authentication session-timeout Sets the interval at which associated clients will be re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication databaseGC 6-72show authentication Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the address filter table Exec 6-68Enterprise AP(config)#address filter default deniedEnterprise AP(config)#
MAC Address Authentication6-716Related Commandsaddress filter entry (6-71)802.1x-supplicant user (6-68)address filter entryThis command enters a MAC address in the filter table.Syntaxaddress filter entry <mac-address> <allowed | denied>•mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens; e.g., 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.)•allowed - Entry is allowed access.•denied - Entry is denied access.DefaultNoneCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand Mode• The access point supports up to 1024 MAC addresses.• An entry in the address table may be allowed or denied access depending on the global setting configured for the address entry default command.ExampleRelated Commandsaddress filter default (6-70)802.1x-supplicant user (6-68)address filter deleteThis command deletes a MAC address from the filter table.Syntaxaddress filter delete <mac-address>mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens.)DefaultNoneEnterprise AP(config)#address filter entry 00-70-50-cc-99-1a allowedEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-726Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleRelated Commands802.1x-supplicant user (6-68)mac-authentication serverThis command sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options. Use the no form to disable MAC address authentication.Syntaxmac-authentication server [local | remote]•local - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the local authentication database during 802.11 association.•remote - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the RADIUS server during 802.1X authentication.DefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleRelated Commandsaddress filter entry (6-71)radius-server address (6-59)802.1x-supplicant user (6-68)mac-authentication session-timeoutThis command sets the interval at which associated clients will be re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database. Use the no form to disable reauthentication.Syntaxmac-authentication session-timeout <minutes>minutes - Re-authentication interval. (Range: 0-1440)Enterprise AP(config)#address filter delete 00-70-50-cc-99-1b Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server remoteEnterprise AP(config)#
Filtering Commands6-736Default0 (disabled)Command ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleFiltering CommandsThe commands described in this section are used to filter communications between wireless clients, control access to the management interface from wireless clients, and filter traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types. filter local-bridgeThis command disables communication between wireless clients. Use the no form to disable this filtering.Syntaxfilter local-bridgeno filter local-bridgeDefaultDisabledCommand ModeEnterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication session-timeout 1Enterprise AP(config)#Table 6-14. Filtering CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagefilter local-bridge Disables communication between wireless clients GC 6-73filter ap-manage Prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface GC 6-74filter uplink enable Ethernet port MAC address filtering GC 6-74filter uplink Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table GC 6-75filter ethernet-type enable Checks the Ethernet type for all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table GC 7-74filter ethernet-type protocol  Sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type GC 6-76show filters Shows the filter configuration Exec 6-77
Command Line Interface6-746Global ConfigurationCommand UsageThis command can disable wireless-to-wireless communications between clients via the access point. However, it does not affect communications between wireless clients and the wired network.Examplefilter ap-manageThis command prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface on the access point. Use the no form to disable this filtering.Syntaxfilter ap-manageno filter ap-manageDefaultEnabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExamplefilter uplink enableThis command enables filtering of MAC addresses from the Ethernet port.Syntax[no] filter uplink enableDefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExampleEnterprise AP(config)#filter local-bridgeEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#filter AP-manageEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink enableEnterprise AP(config)#
Filtering Commands6-756filter uplinkThis command adds or deletes MAC addresses from the uplink filtering table.Syntaxfilter uplink <add | delete> MAC addressMAC address - Specifies a MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. A maximum of eight addresses can be added to the filtering table.DefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationExamplefilter ethernet-type enableThis command checks the Ethernet type on all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. Use the no form to disable this feature.Syntaxfilter ethernet-type enableno filter ethernet-type enableDefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageThis command is used in conjunction with the filter ethernet-type protocol command to determine which Ethernet protocol types are to be filtered.Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink add 00-12-34-56-78-9aEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-766ExampleRelated Commandsfilter ethernet-type protocol (6-76)filter ethernet-type protocolThis command sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type. Use the no form to disable filtering for a specific Ethernet type.Syntaxfilter ethernet-type protocol <protocol>no filter ethernet-type protocol <protocol>protocol - An Ethernet protocol type. (Options: ARP, RARP, Berkeley-Trailer-Negotiation, LAN-Test, X25-Level-3, Banyan, CDP, DEC XNS, DEC-MOP-Dump-Load, DEC-MOP, DEC-LAT, Ethertalk, Appletalk-ARP, Novell-IPX(old), Novell-IPX(new), EAPOL, Telxon-TXP, Aironet-DDP, Enet-Config-Test, IP, IPv6, NetBEUI, PPPoE_Discovery, PPPoE_PPP_Session)DefaultNoneCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageUse the filter ethernet-type enable command to enable filtering for Ethernet types specified in the filtering table, or the no filter ethernet-type enable command to disable all filtering based on the filtering table.ExampleRelated Commandsfilter ethernet-type enable (7-74)Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type enableEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type protocol ARPEnterprise AP(config)#
WDS Bridge Commands6-776show filtersThis command shows the filter options and protocol entries in the filter table. Command ModeExecExampleWDS Bridge Commands The commands described in this section are used to set the operation mode for each access point interface and configure WIreless Distribution System (WDS) forwarding table settings. Enterprise AP#show filtersProtocol Filter Information=========================================================Local Bridge         :ENABLEDAP Management        :ENABLEDEthernet Type Filter :ENABLEDEnabled Protocol Filters---------------------------------------------------------Protocol: ARP                              ISO: 0x0806=========================================================Enterprise AP#Command Function Mode Pagebridge role Selects the bridge operation mode for a radio interface IC-W 6-78bridge-link parent Configures the MAC addresses of the parent bridge node IC-W 6-78bridge-link child Configures MAC addresses of connected child bridge nodes IC-W 6-79bridge dynamic-entry age-time Sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the WDS forwarding table GC 6-80show bridge aging-time Displays the current WDS forwarding table aging time Exec 6-80show bridge filter-entry Displays current entries in the bridge MAC address table Exec 6-81show bridge link Displays current bridge settings for specified interfaces Exec 6-81
Command Line Interface6-786bridge role (WDS)This command selects the bridge operation mode for the radio interface.Syntaxbridge role <ap | repeater | bridge | root-bridge >•ap - Operates only as an access point for wireless clients.•repeater - Operates as a wireless repeater, extending the range for remote wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge. The “Parent” link to the root bridge must be configured. In this mode, traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.•bridge - Operates as a bridge to other access points also in bridge mode.•root-bridge - Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network.Default Setting APCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • When the bridge role is set to “repeater,” the “Parent” link to the root bridge must be configured (see “bridge-link parent” on page 6-78). When the access point is operating in this mode, traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface.• Up to six WDS bridge links (MAC addresses) can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network. One unit only must be configured as the “root bridge” in the wireless network. The root bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN. Other bridges need to specify one “Parent” link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to the root bridge. The other six WDS links are available as “Child” links to other bridges.• The bridge link on the radio interface always uses the default VAP interface. In any bridge mode, VAP interfaces 1 to 7 are not available for use.Example bridge-link parentThis command configures the MAC address of the parent bridge node.Syntaxbridge-link parent <mac-address>mac-address - The wireless MAC address of the parent bridge unit. (12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”).Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge role root-bridgeEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
WDS Bridge Commands6-796Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage Every bridge (except the root bridge) in the wireless bridge network must specify the MAC address of the parent bridge that is linked to the root bridge, or the root bridge itself.Example bridge-link childThis command configures the MAC addresses of child bridge nodes.Syntaxbridge-link child <index> <mac-address>-index - The link index number of the child node. (Range: 1 - 6)-mac-address - The wireless MAC address of a child bridge unit. (12 hexadecimal digits in the form “xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”).Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • Up to six child bridge links can be specified using link index numbers 1 to 6. Example Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link parent 00-08-2d-69-3a-51Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 2 00-08-3e-84-bc-6dEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 3 00-08-3e-85-13-f2Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#bridge-link child 4 00-08-3e-84-79-31Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-806bridge dynamic-entry age-timeThis command sets the time for aging out dynamic entries in the WDS forwarding table.Syntaxbridge dynamic-entry age-time <seconds>seconds - The time to age out an address entry. (Range: 10-10000 seconds).Default Setting 300 secondsCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage If the MAC address of an entry in the address table is not seen on the associated interface for longer than the aging time, the entry is discarded.Example show bridge aging-timeThis command displays the current WDS forwarding table aging time setting.Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP(config)#bridge dynamic-entry age-time 100Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show bridge aging-timeAging time:  300Enterprise AP#
WDS Bridge Commands6-816show bridge filter-entryThis command displays current entries in the WDS forwarding table.Command Mode ExecExample show bridge linkThis command displays WDS bridge link and spanning tree settings for specified interfaces.Syntaxshow bridge link <ethernet | wireless <g> [index]>•ethernet - Specifies the Ethernet interface.•wireless - Specifies a wireless interface.-g - The 802.11g radio interface.-index - The index number of a bridge link. (Range: 1 - 6)Command Mode ExecEnterprise AP#show bridge filter-entrymax entry numbers =512current entry nums =13**************************************************************************************************** Bridge MAC Addr Table ************************************************************************************************************|       MAC       |  Port  |Fwd_type| VlanID|origin life|remain Life|  Type  | 01 80 c2 00 00 00        0        5    4095         300         300   Static 01 80 c2 00 00 03        0        5    4095         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 20        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 21        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 22        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 23        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 24        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 25        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 26        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 27        1        0       1         300         300   Static 00 30 f1 2f be 30        1        3       0         300         175  Dynamic 00 30 f1 f0 9a 9c        1        0       1         300         300   Static ff ff ff ff ff ff        0        4    4095         300         300   StaticEnterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-826Example Enterprise AP#show bridge link wireless gInterface Wireless G WDS Information====================================AP Role:   BridgeParent:    00-12-34-56-78-9aChild:      Child 2:    00-08-12-34-56-de      Child 3:    00-00-00-00-00-00      Child 4:    00-00-00-00-00-00      Child 5:    00-00-00-00-00-00      Child 6:    00-00-00-00-00-00STAs:      No WDS Stations.Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show bridge link wireless g 2Port-No             : 11status              : Enabledstate               : Disabledpriority            : 0path cost           : 19message age Timer   : Inactivemessage age         : 4469designated-root    : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9Cdesignated-cost    : 0designated-bridge  : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9Cdesignated-port    : priority = 0, port No = 11forward-transitions : 0Enterprise AP#Enterprise AP#show bridge link ethernetstatus              : Enabledstate               : Forwardingpriority            : 0path cost           : 19message age Timer   : Inactivemessage age         : 4346designated-root    : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9Cdesignated-cost    : 0designated-bridge  : priority = 32768, MAC = 00:30:F1:F0:9A:9Cdesignated-port    : priority = 0, port No = 1forward-transitions : 1Enterprise AP#
Spanning Tree Commands6-836Spanning Tree CommandsThe commands described in this section are used to set the MAC address table aging time and spanning tree parameters for both the Ethernet and wireless interfaces. bridge stp enableThis command enables the Spanning Tree Protocol. Use the no form to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol.Syntax bridge stp enableno bridge stp enableDefault Setting EnabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample This example globally enables the Spanning Tree Protocol.Table 6-15. Bridge CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagebridge stp enable Enables the Spanning Tree feature GC 6-83bridge stp forwarding-delay Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 6-84bridge stp hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 6-84bridge stp max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 6-85bridge stp priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 6-85bridge-link path-cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of a port IC 6-86bridge-link port-priority Configures the spanning tree priority of a port IC 6-86show bridge stp Displays the global spanning tree settings Exec 6-87show bridge link Displays current bridge settings for specified interfaces Exec 6-81Enterprise AP(config)bridge stp enableEnterprise AP(config)
Command Line Interface6-846bridge stp forwarding-delayUse this command to configure the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.Syntax bridge stp forwarding-delay <seconds>no bridge stp forwarding-delayseconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1]. Default Setting 15 secondsCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.Example bridge stp hello-timeUse this command to configure the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.Syntax bridge stp hello-time <time>no bridge stp hello-timetime - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds). The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1]. Default Setting 2 secondsCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp forwarding-delay 20Enterprise AP(config)#
Spanning Tree Commands6-856Example bridge stp max-ageUse this command to configure the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.Syntax bridge stp max-age <seconds>no bridge stp max-ageseconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].Default Setting 20 secondsCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.Example bridge stp priorityUse this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for the wireless bridge. Use the no form to restore the default.Syntax bridge stp priority<priority>no bridge stp prioritypriority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535) Default Setting 32768Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp hello-time 5Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp max-age 40Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-866Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device. Example bridge-link path-costUse this command to configure the spanning tree path cost for the specified port.Syntax bridge-link path-cost <index> <cost> •index - Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge. (Range: 1-6 required on wireless interface only)•cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-65535)Default Setting 19Command Mode Interface ConfigurationCommand Usage • This command is used by the Spanning Tree Protocol to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. • Path cost takes precedence over port priority.Example bridge-link port-priorityUse this command to configure the priority for the specified port. Syntax bridge-link port-priority <index> <priority>•index - Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge. (Range: 1-6 required on wireless interface only)•priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 1-255)Enterprise AP(config)#bridge stp-bridge priority 40000Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless a)#bridge-link path-cost 1 50Enterprise AP(if-wireless a)#
Spanning Tree Commands6-876Default Setting 128Command Mode Interface ConfigurationCommand Usage • This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a wireless bridge are the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree. • Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.Example Related Commandsbridge-link path-cost (6-86)show bridge stpThis command displays aging time and spanning tree settings for the Ethernet and  wireless interfaces.Syntaxshow bridge stpCommand ModeExecExampleEnterprise AP(if-wireless a)#bridge-link port-priority 1 64Enterprise AP(if-wireless a)#Enterprise AP#show bridge stpBridge MAC           : 00:12:CF:05:B7:84Status               : Disabledpriority             : 0designated-root     : priority = 0, MAC = 00:00:00:00:00:00root-path-cost       : 0root-Port-no         : 0Hold Time            :     1 SecondsHello Time           :     2 SecondsMaximum Age          :    20 SecondsForward Delay        :    15 Secondsbridge Hello Time    :     2 Secondsbridge Maximum Age   :    20 Secondsbridge Forward Delay :    15 Secondstime-since-top-change: 89185 Secondstopology-change-count: 0Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-886Ethernet Interface Commands The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the Ethernet port and wireless interface.interface ethernetThis command enters Ethernet interface configuration mode.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the 10/100Base-TX network interface, enter the following command:Table 6-16. Ethernet Interface CommandsCommand Function Mode Pageinterface ethernet Enters Ethernet interface configuration mode  GC 6-88dns primary- server Specifies the primary name server IC-E 6-89dns secondary- server Specifies the secondary name server IC-E 6-89ip address  Sets the IP address for the Ethernet interface IC-E 6-89ip dhcp Submits a DHCP request for an IP address IC-E 6-90speed-duplex  Configures speed and duplex operation on the Ethernet interface IC-E 6-91shutdown Disables the Ethernet interface IC-E 6-92show interface ethernet Shows the status for the Ethernet interface Exec 6-92Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Ethernet Interface Commands6-896dns serverThis command specifies the address for the primary or secondary domain name server to be used for name-to-address resolution. Syntaxdns primary-server <server-address>dns secondary-server <server-address>•primary-server - Primary server used for name resolution.•secondary-server - Secondary server used for name resolution.•server-address - IP address of domain-name server.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage The primary and secondary name servers are queried in sequence. ExampleThis example specifies two domain-name servers.Related Commands show interface ethernet (6-92)ip address This command sets the IP address for the access point. Use the no form to restore the default IP address.Syntaxip address <ip-address> <netmask> <gateway>no ip address•ip-address - IP address •netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets. •gateway - IP address of the default gatewayDefault Setting IP address: 192.168.2.2Netmask: 255.255.255.0Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns primary-server 192.168.1.55Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server 10.1.0.55Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Command Line Interface6-906Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Command Usage • DHCP is enabled by default. To manually configure a new IP address, you must first disable the DHCP client with the no ip dhcp command.• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using this command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using the ip dhcp command. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program. ExampleRelated Commandsip dhcp (6-90)ip dhcp This command enables the access point to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. Use the no form to restore the default IP address.Syntax ip dhcpno ip dhcpDefault Setting EnabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Command Usage • You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using the ip address command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using this command. Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernetEnter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Ethernet Interface Commands6-916• When you use this command, the access point will begin broadcasting DHCP client requests. The current IP address (i.e., default or manually configured address) will continue to be effective until a DHCP reply is received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (DHCP values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.) ExampleRelated Commandsip address (6-89)speed-duplexThis command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.Syntax speed-duplex <auto | 10MH | 10MF | 100MF | 100MH>•auto - autonegotiate speed and duplex mode•10MH - Forces 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation•10MF - Forces 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation •100MH - Forces 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation •100MF - Forces 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation Default Setting Auto-negotiation is enabled by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Command UsageIf autonegotiation is disabled, the speed and duplex mode must be configured to match the setting of the attached device.Example The following example configures the Ethernet port to 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernetEnter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip dhcpEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#speed-duplex 100mfEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Command Line Interface6-926shutdown This command disables the Ethernet interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form.Syntax shutdownno shutdownDefault Setting Interface enabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet)Command Usage This command allows you to disable the Ethernet port due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also want to disable the Ethernet port for security reasons. Example The following example disables the Ethernet port.show interface ethernetThis command displays the status for the Ethernet interface.Syntaxshow interface [ethernet]Default Setting Ethernet interfaceCommand Mode ExecEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#shutdownEnterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-936Example Wireless Interface CommandsThe commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the wireless interfaces.Enterprise AP#show interface ethernetEthernet Interface Information========================================IP Address          : 192.168.2.2Subnet Mask         : 255.255.255.0Default Gateway     : 192.168.1.253Primary DNS         : 192.168.1.55Secondary DNS       : 10.1.0.55Speed-duplex        : 100Base-TX Half DuplexAdmin status        : UpOperational status  : Up========================================Enterprise AP#Table 6-17. Wireless Interface CommandsCommand Function Mode Pageinterface wireless Enters wireless interface configuration mode  GC 6-95vap Provides access to the VAP interface configuration mode IC-W 6-95speed Configures the maximum  data rate at  which the access point transmits unicast packets IC-W 6-96turbo Configures turbo mode to use a faster data rate IC-W (a) 7-96multicast-data-rate Configures the maximum rate for transmitting multicast packets on the wireless interface IC-W 6-96channel Configures the radio channel  IC-W 6-97transmit-power Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point IC-W 6-97radio-mode Forces the operating mode of the 802.11g radio IC-W (b/g) 6-98preamble Sets the length of the 802.11g signal preamble IC-W (b/g) 6-99antenna control Selects the antenna control method to use for the radio IC-W 6-99antenna id Selects the antenna ID to use for the radio IC-W 6-100antenna location Selects the location of the antenna IC-W 6-101
Command Line Interface6-946beacon-interval Configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point IC-W 6-101dtim-period Configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissionsIC-W 6-102fragmentation- length Configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented IC-W 6-102rts-threshold Sets the packet size threshold at which an RTS must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communicationsIC-W 6-103super-a Enables Atheros proprietary Super A performance enhancements IC-W (a) 7-105super-g Enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements IC-W (b/g) 6-104description Adds a description to the wireless interface  IC-W-VAP 6-104ssid Configures the service set identifier IC-W-VAP 6-105closed system Opens access to clients without a pre-configured SSID IC-W-VAP 6-105max-association Configures the maximum number of clients that can be associated with the access point at the same time IC-W-VAP 6-106assoc- timeout-interval Configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interfaceIC-W-VAP 6-106auth- timeout-value Configures the time interval after which clients must be re-authenticated IC-W-VAP 6-106shutdown Disables the wireless interface IC-W-VAP 6-107show interface wireless Shows the status for the wireless interface Exec 6-108show station Shows the wireless clients associated with the access point Exec 6-109Table 6-17. Wireless Interface CommandsCommand Function Mode Page
Wireless Interface Commands6-956interface wirelessThis command enters wireless interface configuration mode.Syntaxinterface wireless <g>•g - 802.11g radio interface.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the 802.11g interface, enter the following command:vapThis command provides access to the VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface configuration mode.Syntaxvap <vap-id>vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0-7)Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)ExampleEnterprise AP(config)#interface wireless gEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
Command Line Interface6-966speedThis command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point transmits unicast packets. Syntaxspeed <speed>speed - Maximum access speed allowed for wireless clients.   (Options for 802.11b/g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps)Default Setting 54 MbpsCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the data rate, the longer the transmission distance. Please refer to the table for maximum distances on page C-5.Examplemulticast-data-rateThis command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point transmits multicast and management packets (excluding beacon packets) on the wireless interface. Syntaxmulticast-data-rate <speed>speed - Maximum transmit speed allowed for multicast data.(Options for 802.11b/g; 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps)Default Setting 1 Mbps for 802.11b/gCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)ExampleEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#speed 6Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#multicast-data-rate 5.5Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-976channelThis command configures the radio channel through which the access point communicates with wireless clients. Syntaxchannel <channel | auto>•channel - Manually sets the radio channel used for communications with wireless clients. (Range for 802.11b/g: 1 to 11)•auto - Automatically selects an unoccupied channel (if available). Otherwise, the lowest channel is selected.Default Setting Automatic channel selection Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • The available channel settings are limited by local regulations, which determine the number of channels that are available. • When multiple access points are deployed in the same area, be sure to choose a channel separated by at least five channels for 802.11b/g. You can deploy up to three access points for 802.11b/g (e.g., channels 1, 6, 11).• For most wireless adapters, the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked.Exampletransmit-powerThis command adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point.Syntaxtransmit-power <signal-strength>signal-strength - Signal strength transmitted from the access point. (Options: full, half, quarter, eighth, min)Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#channel 1Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-986Default Setting fullCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • The “min” keyword indicates minimum power.• The longer the transmission distance, the higher the transmission power required. But to support the maximum number of users in an area, you must keep the power as low as possible. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also have to ensure that high strength signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in your area.Example radio-modeThis command forces the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless interface.Syntaxradio-mode <b | g | b+g>•b - b-only mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point, but 802.11g clients can only transfer data at 802.11b standard rates (up to 11 Mbps).•g - g-only mode: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up to 54 Mbps).•b+g - b & g mixed mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up to 54 Mbps).Default Settingb+g modeCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)Command Usage • For Japan, only 13 channels are available when set to g or b+g modes. When set to b mode, 14 channels are available.• Both the 802.11g and 802.11b standards operate within the 2.4 GHz band. If you are operating in g mode, any 802.11b devices in the service area will contribute to the radio frequency noise and affect network performance.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#transmit-power halfEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-996ExamplepreambleThis command sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a 802.11b/g data transmission.Syntaxpreamble [long | short]•long - Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds).•short - Sets the preamble to short (96 microseconds).Default SettingShort-or-LongCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11b/g)Command Usage• Using a short preamble instead of a long preamble can increase data throughput on the access point, but requires that all clients can support a short preamble.• Set the preamble to long to ensure the access point can support all 802.11b and 802.11g clients.Exampleantenna controlThis command selects the use of two diversity antennas or a single antenna for the radio interface.Note:   This access point does not support the use of optional external antennas.Syntaxantenna control <diversity | left | right>•diversity - The radio uses both antennas in a diversity system. Select this method when the Antenna ID is set to “Default Antenna” to use the access point's integrated antennas.•left - The radio only uses the antenna on the left side (the side farthest from the access point LEDs).•right - The radio only uses the antenna on the right side (the side closest to the access point LEDs).Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#radio-mode gEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#preamble shortEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1006Default SettingDiversityCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)Command UsageThe antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options.Example antenna idThis command specifies the antenna type connected to the access point represented by a four-digit hexadecimal ID number, either the integrated diversity antennas (the "Default Antenna") or an optional external antenna.Note:   This access point does not support the use of optional external antennas.Syntaxantenna id <antenna-id>•antenna-id - Specifies the ID number of an approved antenna that is connected to the access point.(Range: 0x0000 - 0xFFFF)Default Setting0x0000 (built-in antennas)Command ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage• The optional external antennas (if any) that are certified for use with the access point are listed by typing antenna control id ?. Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures that the access point's radio transmissions are within regulatory power limits for the country of operation. • The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options.Example Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna control rightEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna id 0000Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-1016antenna locationThis command selects the antenna mounting location for the radio interface.Syntaxantenna location <indoor | outdoor>•indoor - The antenna is mounted indoors.•outdoor - The antenna is mounted outdoors.Default SettingIndoorCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage• Selecting the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio channels that are permitted in the country of operation.Example beacon-interval This command configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point. Syntaxbeacon-interval <interval>interval - The rate for transmitting beacon signals. (Range: 20-1000 milliseconds)Default Setting 100Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point. They may also carry power-management information.ExampleEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna location indoorEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1026dtim-period This command configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions. Syntaxdtim-period <interval>interval - Interval between the beacon frames that transmit broadcast or multicast traffic. (Range: 1-255 beacon frames)Default Setting 1Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • The Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) packet interval value indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic. This parameter is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode.• The DTIM is the interval between two synchronous frames with broadcast/multicast information. The default value of 2 indicates that the access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon.• Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner, causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the transmission of broadcast/multicast frames.Examplefragmentation-length This command configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when passing through the access point. Syntaxfragmentation-length <length>length - Minimum packet size for which fragmentation is allowed. (Range: 256-2346 bytes)Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#dtim-period 100Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-1036Default Setting 2346Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • If the packet size is smaller than the preset Fragment size, the packet will not be segmented.• Fragmentation of the PDUs (Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability of transmissions because it increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size. If there is significant interference present, or collisions due to high network utilization, try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed up the retransmission of smaller frames. However, it is more efficient to set the fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires overhead to send multiple frames.Examplerts-thresholdThis command sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS) signal must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications.Syntaxrts-threshold <threshold>threshold - Threshold packet size for which to send an RTS. (Range: 0-2347 bytes)Default Setting 2347Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • If the threshold is set to 0, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set to 2347, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled.• The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#fragmentation-length 512Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1046CTS frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data. • Access points contending for the wireless medium may not be aware of each other. The RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node” problem.Examplesuper-g This command enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements. Use the no form to disable this function.Syntax[no] super-g Default Setting DisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)Command Usage These enhancements include bursting, compression, fast frames and dynamic turbo. Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients.Exampledescription This command adds a description to a the wireless interface. Use the no form to remove the description.Syntaxdescription <string>no descriptionstring - Comment or a description for this interface. (Range: 1-80 characters)Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rts-threshold 256Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super gEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Interface Commands6-1056ExamplessidThis command configures the service set identifier (SSID). Syntaxssid <string>string - The name of a basic service set supported by the access point. (Range: 1 - 32 characters)Default Setting 802.11g Radio: SMC_VAP_11G0 (0 to 7)Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage Clients that want to connect to the wireless network via an access point must set their SSIDs to the same as that of the access point.Exampleclosed-systemThis command prohibits access to clients without a pre-configured SSID. Use the no form to disable this feature.Syntaxclosed-system no closed-systemDefault Setting DisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage When closed system is enabled, the access point will not include its SSID in beacon messages. Nor will it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#description RD-AP#3Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#ssid RD-AP#3Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1066Examplemax-association This command configures the maximum number of clients that can be associated with the access point at the same time.Syntaxmax-association <count>count - Maximum number of associated stations. (Range: 0-64)Default Setting 64Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Example assoc-timeout-intervalThis command configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after which the client is disassociated from the VAP interface.Syntaxassoc-timeout-interval <minutes>minutes - The number of minutes of inactivity before disassociation. (Range: 5-60)Default Setting 30Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Exampleauth-timeout-valueThis command configures the time interval within which clients must complete authentication to the VAP interface.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#closed-systemEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#max-association 32Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#association-timeout-interval 20Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
Wireless Interface Commands6-1076Syntaxauth-timeout-value <minutes>minutes - The number of minutes before re-authentication. (Range: 5-60)Default Setting 60Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Exampleshutdown This command disables the wireless interface. Use the no form to restart the interface.Syntax shutdownno shutdownDefault Setting Interface enabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command UsageYou must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable VAP interfaces 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.Example Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth-timeout-value 40Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#shutdownEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1086show interface wirelessThis command displays the status for the wireless interface.Syntaxshow interface wireless <g> vap-id•g - 802.11g radio interface.•vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0~7)Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP#show interface wireless g 0Wireless Interface Information===========================================================----------------Identification-----------------------------Description                     : Enterprise 802.11g Access PointSSID                            : VAP_TEST_11G 0Turbo Mode                      : OFFChannel                         : 1 (AUTO)Status                          : Disable----------------802.11 Parameters--------------------------Transmit Power                  : FULL (13 dBm)Max Station Data Rate           : 54MbpsMulticast Data Rate             : 5.5MbpsFragmentation Threshold         : 2346 bytesRTS Threshold                   : 2347 bytesBeacon Interval                 : 100 TUsAuthentication Timeout Interval : 60 MinsAssociation Timeout Interval    : 30 MinsDTIM Interval                   : 1 beaconPreamble Length                 : LONGMaximum Association             : 64 stationsVLAN ID                         : 1----------------Security------------------------------------Closed System                   : DISABLEDMulticast cipher                : WEPWPA clients                     : WEP-ONLYWPA Key Mgmt Mode               : PRE SHARED KEYWPA PSK Key Type                : ALPHANUMERICEncryption                      : DISABLEDDefault Transmit Key            : 1Common Static Keys              : Key 1: EMPTY     Key 2: EMPTY                                  Key 3: EMPTY     Key 4: EMPTYAuthentication Type             : OPEN==========================================================Enterprise AP#
Rogue AP Detection Commands6-1096show stationThis command shows the wireless clients associated with the access point.Command Mode ExecExample Rogue AP Detection CommandsA “rogue AP” is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue APs can potentially allow unauthorized users access to the network. Alternatively, client stations may mistakenly associate to a rogue AP and be prevented from accessing network resources. Rogue APs may also cause radio interference and degrade the wireless LAN performance.The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range. A database of nearby access points is maintained where any rogue APs can be identified.Enterprise AP#show stationStation Table Information========================================================if-wireless G VAP [1]   :802.11g Channel : 1No 802.11g Channel Stations....Enterprise AP#Table 6-18. Rogue AP Detection CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagerogue-ap enable Enables the periodic detection of other nearby access points GC 6-110rogue-ap authenticate Enables identification of all access points GC 6-111rogue-ap duration Sets the duration that all channels are scanned GC 6-111rogue-ap interval Sets the time between each scan GC 6-112rogue-ap scan Forces an immediate scan of all radio channels GC 6-112show rogue-ap Shows the current database of detected access points Exec 6-113
Command Line Interface6-1106rogue-ap enableThis command enables the periodic detection of nearby access points. Use the no form to disable periodic detection.Syntax[no] rogue-ap enableDefault SettingDisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.• A “rogue AP” is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID (MAC address) or SSID configuration. A database of nearby access points should therefore be maintained on a RADIUS server, allowing any rogue APs to be identified (see “rogue-ap authenticate” on page 6-111). The rogue AP database can be viewed using the show rogue-ap command.• The access point sends Syslog messages for each detected access point during a rogue AP scan.
Rogue AP Detection Commands6-1116Example rogue-ap authenticateThis command forces the unit to authenticate all access points on the network. Use the no form to disable this function.Syntax[no] rogue-ap authenticateDefault SettingDisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage Enabling authentication in conjunction with a database of approved access points stored on a RADIUS server allows the access point to discover rogue APs. With authentication enabled and a configure RADIUS server, the access point checks the MAC address/Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of each access point that it finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the access point is allowed. With authentication disabled, the access point can identify its neighboring access points only; it cannot identify whether the access points are allowed or are rogues. If you enable authentication, you should also configure a RADIUS server  for this access point (see “RADIUS” on page 5-7).Example rogue-ap durationThis command sets the scan duration for detecting access points.Syntaxrogue-ap duration <milliseconds>milliseconds - The duration of the scan. (Range: 100-1000 milliseconds)Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap enableconfigure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap authenticateEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1126Default Setting350 millisecondsCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • During a scan, client access may be disrupted and new clients may not be able to associate to the access point. If clients experience severe disruption, reduce the scan duration time.• A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area, but causes more disruption to client access.Example Related Commandsrogue-ap interval (6-112)rogue-ap intervalThis command sets the interval at which to scan for access points.Syntaxrogue-ap interval <minutes>minutes - The interval between consecutive scans. (Range: 30-10080 minutes)Default Setting720 minutesCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage This command sets the interval at which scans occur. Frequent scanning will more readily detect other access points, but will cause more disruption to client access.Example Related Commandsrogue-ap duration (6-111)Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap duration 200Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap interval 120Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Rogue AP Detection Commands6-1136rogue-ap scanThis command starts an immediate scan for access points on the radio interface.Default SettingDisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.Example show rogue-apThis command displays the current rogue AP database.Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap scanEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogueApDetect Completed (Radio G) : 9 APs detectedrogueAPDetect (Radio G): refreshing ap database nowEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP#show rogue-ap802.11g Channel : Rogue AP StatusAP Address(BSSID)            SSID   Channel(MHz) RSSI Type Privacy RSN======================================================================00-04-e2-2a-37-23         WLAN1AP   11(2462 MHz)   17  ESS       0   000-04-e2-2a-37-3d             ANY    7(2442 MHz)   42  ESS       0   000-04-e2-2a-37-49         WLAN1AP    9(2452 MHz)   42  ESS       0   000-90-d1-08-9d-a7         WLAN1AP    1(2412 MHz)   12  ESS       0   000-30-f1-fb-31-f4            WLAN    6(2437 MHz)   16  ESS       0   0Enterprise AP#
Command Line Interface6-1146Wireless Security CommandsThe commands described in this section configure parameters for wireless security on the 802.11g interface.authThis command defines the 802.11 authentication type allowed by the VAP interface. Syntaxauth <open-system | shared-key | wpa | wpa-psk | wpa2 | wpa2-psk |  wpa-wpa2-mixed | wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed | > <required | supported>•open-system - Accepts the client without verifying its identity using a shared key. “Open” authentication means either there is no encryption (if encryption is disabled) or WEP-only encryption is used (if encryption is enabled). •shared-key - Authentication is based on a shared key that has been distributed to all stations. If encryption is enabled, “shared” authentication uses WEP-only encryption.•wpa - Clients using WPA are accepted for authentication.•wpa-psk - Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.•wpa2 - Clients using WPA2 are accepted for authentication.Table 6-19. Wireless Security CommandsCommand Function Mode Pageauth Defines the 802.11 authentication type allowed by the access point IC-W-VAP 6-117encryption  Defines whether or not WEP encryption is used to provide privacy for wireless communications IC-W-VAP 6-116key  Sets the keys used for WEP encryption IC-W 6-117transmit-key Sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames sent between the access point and wireless clientsIC-W-VAP 6-118cipher-suite Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic IC-W-VAP 6-119mic_mode Specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check (MIC) IC-W 6-120wpa-pre-shared- key  Defines a WPA preshared-key value IC-W-VAP 6-121pmksa-lifetime Sets the lifetime PMK security associations IC-W-VAP 6-121pre-authentication Enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast roaming IC-W-VAP 6-122
Wireless Security Commands6-1156•wpa2-psk - Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.•wpa-wpa2-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication.•wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication•required - Clients are required to use WPA or WPA2.•supported - Clients may use WPA or WPA2, if supported.Default Setting open-systemCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • To use WEP, set the authentication method to either “open-system” or “shared-key.” Shared key authentication can only be used when WEP is enabled with the encryption command, and at least one static WEP key has been defined with the key command. • When any WPA or WPA2 option is selected, clients are authenticated using 802.1X via a RADIUS server. Each client must be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client software. The 802.1X settings (see “802.1X Authentication” on page 6-65) and RADIUS server details (see “RADIUS Client” on page 6-59) must be configured on the access point. A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network.• If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected (WPA, WPA2, WPA-WPA2-mixed, or WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the 802.1X settings (see “802.1X Authentication” on page 6-65) and RADIUS server details (see “RADIUS Client” on page 6-59) must be configured. Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling authentication. Also, note that each client has to be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client software. A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network.• If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the key must first be generated and distributed to all wireless clients before they can successfully associate with the access point. Use the wpa-preshared-key command to configure the key (see “key” on page 6-117 and “transmit-key” on page 6-118).  • WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common VAP interface. When the encryption cipher suite is set to TKIP, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or AES-CCMP) is negotiated for each client. The access point advertises it’s supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in the
Command Line Interface6-1166association request to the access point. For mixed-mode operation, the cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed.• The “required” option places the VAP into TKIP only mode. The “supported” option places the VAP into TKIP+AES+WEP mode. The “required” mode is used in WPA-only environments. • The “supported” mode can be used for mixed environments with legacy WPA products, specifically WEP. (For example, WPA+WEP. The WPA2+WEP environment is not available because WPA2 does not support WEP).  To place the VAP into AES only mode, use “required” and then select the “cipher-ccmp” option for the cipher-suite command.ExampleRelated Commandsencryption (6-116)key (6-117)encryption This command enables data encryption for wireless communications. Use the no form to disable data encryption.Syntaxencryptionno encryptionDefault Setting disabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is implemented in this device to prevent unauthorized access to your wireless network. For more secure data transmissions, enable encryption with this command, and set at least one static WEP key with the key command. • The WEP settings must be the same on each client in your wireless network.• Note that WEP protects data transmitted between wireless nodes, but does not protect any transmissions over your wired network or over the Internet.• You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, and AES-CCMP) in the access point. Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth shared-keyEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Security Commands6-1176ExampleRelated Commandskey (6-117)key This command sets the keys used for WEP encryption. Use the no form to delete a configured key.Syntaxkey <index> <size> <type> <value>no key index•index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)•size - Key size. (Options: 64, 128, or 152 bits)•type - Input format. (Options: ASCII, HEX)•value - The key string.- For 64-bit keys, use 5 alphanumeric characters or 10 hexadecimal digits.- For 128-bit keys, use 13 alphanumeric characters or 26 hexadecimal digits.- For 152-bit keys, use 16 alphanumeric characters or 32 hexadecimal digits.Default Setting NoneCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • To enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), use the auth shared-key command to select the “shared key” authentication type, use the encryption command to enable data encryption, use the key command to configure at least one key, and use the transmit-key command to assign a key to one of the VAP interfaces.• If you enable Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2) with a pre-shared key option, use the encryption command to enable data encryption, use the key command to configure at least one key, and use the transmit-key command to assign a key to one of the VAP interfaces.• If WEP or WPA/WPA2 with a pre-shared key option is enabled, all wireless clients must be configured with the same shared keys to communicate with the access point.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryptionEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1186• The encryption index, length and type configured in the access point must match those configured in the clients.ExampleRelated Commandskey (6-117)encryption (6-116)transmit-key (6-118)transmit-keyThis command sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames for broadcast or multicast traffic transmitted from the VAP to wireless clients.Syntaxtransmit-key <index>index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)Default Setting 1Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • If you use WEP key encryption or WPA/WPA2 with a pre-shared key option, the access point uses the transmit key to encrypt multicast and broadcast data signals that it sends to client devices. Other keys can be used for decryption of data from clients.• When using IEEE 802.1X, the access point uses a dynamic key to encrypt unicast and broadcast messages to 802.1X-enabled clients. However, because the access point sends the keys during the 802.1X authentication process, these keys do not have to appear in the client’s key list.• In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static keys and WPA, select transmit key index 2, 3, or 4. The access point uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys.Example Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#key 1 64 hex 1234512345Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#key 2 128 ascii asdeipadjsipdEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#key 3 64 hex 12345123451234512345123456Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#transmit-key 2Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Security Commands6-1196cipher-suite This command defines the cipher algorithm used to encrypt the global key for broadcast and multicast traffic when using Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. Syntaxmulticast-cipher <aes-ccmp | tkip | wep>•aes-ccmp - Use AES-CCMP encryption for the unicast and multicast cipher.•tkip - Use TKIP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client. •wep - Use WEP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client. Default Setting wepCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • WPA enables the access point to support different unicast encryption keys for each client. However, the global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients.• If any clients supported by the access point are not WPA enabled, the multicast-cipher algorithm must be set to WEP.• WEP is the first generation security protocol used to encrypt data crossing the wireless medium using a fairly short key. Communicating devices must use the same WEP key to encrypt and decrypt radio signals. WEP has many security flaws, and is not recommended for transmitting highly sensitive data.• TKIP provides data encryption enhancements including per-packet key hashing (i.e., changing the encryption key on each packet), a message integrity check, an extended initialization vector with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. Select TKIP if  there are clients in the network that  are not WPA2 compliant.• TKIP defends against attacks on WEP in which the unencrypted initialization vector in encrypted packets is used to calculate the WEP key. TKIP changes the encryption key on each packet, and rotates not just the unicast keys, but the broadcast keys as well. TKIP is a replacement for WEP that removes the predictability that intruders relied on to determine the WEP key.
Command Line Interface6-1206• AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol): WPA2 is backward compatible with WPA, including the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption. The main enhancement is its use of AES Counter-Mode encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2-compliant hardware.Example mic_mode This command specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check (MIC). Syntaxmic_mode <hardware | software>•hardware - Uses hardware to calculate the MIC.•software - Uses software to calculate the MIC.Default Setting softwareCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • The Michael Integrity Check (MIC) is part of the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption used in Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted packet and this can impact throughput and performance. The access point supports a choice of hardware or software for MIC calculation. The performance of the access point can be improved by selecting the best method for the specific deployment. • Using the “hardware” option provides best performance when the number of supported clients is less than 27. • Using the “software” option provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one radio interface. Throughput may be reduced when interfaces are supporting a high number of clients simultaneously.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#multicast-cipher TKIPEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Wireless Security Commands6-1216Example wpa-pre-shared-key This command defines a Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2) preshared-key.Syntaxwpa-pre-shared-key <hex | passphrase-key> <value>•hex - Specifies hexadecimal digits as the key input format.•passphrase-key - Specifies an ASCII pass-phrase string as the key input format.•value - The key string. For ASCII input, specify a string between 8 and 63 characters. For HEX input, specify exactly 64 digits.Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • To support WPA or WPA2 for client authentication, use the auth command to specify the authentication type, and use the wpa-preshared-key command to specify one static key.• If WPA or WPA2 is used with pre-shared-key mode, all wireless clients must be configured with the same pre-shared key to communicate with the access point’s VAP interface.Example Related Commandsauth (6-114)pmksa-lifetime This command sets the time for aging out cached WPA2 Pairwise Master Key Security Association (PMKSA) information for fast roaming.Syntaxpmksa-lifetime <minutes>minutes - The time for aging out PMKSA information. (Range: 0 - 14400 minutes)Default Setting 720 minutesEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#mic_mode hardwareEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecretEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1226Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security information in a cache, so that if a client roams away from an access point and then returns reauthentication is not required. • When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a Security Association that the access point names and holds in a cache. The lifetime of this security association can be configured with this command. When the lifetime expires, the client security association and keys are deleted from the cache. If the client returns to the access point, it requires full reauthentication.• The access point can store up to 256 entries in the PMKSA cache. Example pre-authentication This command enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast secure roaming.Syntaxpre-authentication <enable | disable>•enable - Enables pre-authentication for the VAP interface. •disable - Disables pre-authentication for the VAP interface.Default Setting DisabledCommand Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • Each time a client roams to another access point it has to be fully re-authenticated. This authentication process is time consuming and can disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes a mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated. The first time a client is authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated. When the client is about to roam to another access point in the network, the access point sends pre-authentication messages to the new access point that include the client’s security association information. Then when the client sends an association request to the new access point the client is Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecretEnterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
Link Integrity Commands6-1236known to be already authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association.• To support pre-authentication, both clients and access points in the network must be WPA2 enabled.• Pre-authentication requires all access points in the network to be on the same IP subnet.Example Link Integrity CommandsThe access point provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that wireless clients are connected to resources on the wired network. The access point does this by periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the wired Ethernet network. If the access point detects that the connection to the host has failed, it disables the radio interfaces, forcing clients to find and associate with another access point. When the connection to the host is restored, the access point re-enables the radio interfaces.Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecretEnterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#Table 6-20. Link Integrity CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagelink-integrity ping-detect Enables link integrity detection GC 6-124link-integrity ping-host Specifies the IP address of a host device in the wired network GC 6-124link-integrity ping-interval Specifies the time between each Ping sent to the link host GC 6-125link-integrity ping-fail-retry Specifies the number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost GC 6-125link-integrity ethernet-detect Enables integrity check for Ethernet link GC 6-125show link-integrity Displays the current link integrity configuration Exec 6-126
Command Line Interface6-1246link-integrity ping-detectThis command enables link integrity detection. Use the no form to disable link integrity detection.Syntax[no] link-integrity ping-detectDefault SettingDisabledCommand Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage • When link integrity is enabled, the IP address of a host device in the wired network must be specified.• The access point periodically sends an ICMP echo request (Ping) packet to the link host IP address. When the number of failed responses (either the host does not respond or is unreachable) exceeds the limit set by the link-integrity ping-fail-retry command, the link is determined as lost.Example link-integrity ping-hostThis command configures the link host name or IP address. Use the no form to remove the host setting.Syntaxlink-integrity ping-host <host_name | ip_address>no link-integrity ping-host•host_name - Alias of the host. •ip_address - IP address of the host.Default SettingNoneCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-detectEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-host 192.168.1.10Enterprise AP(config)#
Link Integrity Commands6-1256link-integrity ping-intervalThis command configures the time between each Ping sent to the link host. Syntaxlink-integrity ping-interval <interval>interval - The time between Pings. (Range: 5 - 60 seconds)Default Setting30 secondsCommand Mode Global ConfigurationExample link-integrity ping-fail-retryThis command configures the number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost.Syntaxlink-integrity ping-fail-retry <counts>counts - The number of failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost. (Range: 1 - 10)Default Setting6Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample link-integrity ethernet-detectThis command enables an integrity check to determine whether or not the access point is connected to the wired Ethernet.Syntax[no] link-integrity ethernet-detectDefault SettingDISAEnterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-interval 20Enterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-fail-retry 10Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-1266Command Mode Global ConfigurationExample show link-integrityThis command displays the current link integrity configuration.Command Mode ExecExample Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ethernet-detectNotification : Ethernet Link Detect SUCCESS - RADIO(S) ENABLEDEnterprise AP(config)#Enterprise AP#show link-integrityLink Integrity Information=========================================================== Ethernet Detect : Enabled Ping Detect     : Enabled Target IP/Name  : 192.168.0.140 Ping Fail Retry : 6 Ping Interval   : 30===========================================================Enterprise AP#
IAPP Commands6-1276IAPP CommandsThe command described in this section enables the protocol signaling required to ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant access points. In other words, the 802.11f protocol can ensure successful roaming between access points in a multi-vendor environment.iappThis command enables the protocol signaling required to hand over wireless clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant access points. Use the no form to disable 802.11f signaling.Syntax[no] iappDefaultEnabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand UsageThe current 802.11 standard does not specify the signaling required between access points in order to support clients roaming from one access point to another. In particular, this can create a problem for clients roaming between access points from different vendors. This command is used to enable or disable 802.11f handover signaling between different access points, especially in a multi-vendor environment.ExampleEnterprise AP(config)#iappEnterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-1286VLAN CommandsThe access point can enable the support of VLAN-tagged traffic passing between wireless clients and the wired network. Up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move around a campus site.When VLAN is enabled on the access point, a VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network. If a user does not have a configured VLAN ID, the access point assigns the user to its own configured native VLAN ID.Caution:  When VLANs are enabled, the access point’s Ethernet port drops all received traffic that does not include a VLAN tag. To maintain network connectivity to the access point and wireless clients, be sure that the access point is connected to a device port on a wired network that supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tags.The VLAN commands supported by the access point are listed below. vlanThis command enables VLANs for all traffic. Use the no form to disable VLANs.Syntax[no] vlan enable DefaultDisabledCommand ModeGlobal ConfigurationCommand Description• When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the VLAN ID configured for each client on the RADIUS server. If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server, then the frames are tagged with the access point’s native VLAN ID.Table 6-21. VLAN CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagevlan Enables a single VLAN for all traffic GC 6-128management-vlanid  Configures the management VLAN for the access point GC 6-129vlan-id  Configures the default VLAN for the VAP interface IC-W-VAP 6-129
VLAN Commands6-1296• Traffic entering the Ethernet port must be tagged with a VLAN ID that matches the access point’s native VLAN ID, or with a VLAN tag that matches one of the wireless clients currently associated with the access point.ExampleRelated Commandsmanagement-vlanid (6-129)management-vlanid This command configures the management VLAN ID for the access point. Syntaxmanagement-vlanid <vlan-id>vlan-id - Management VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)Default Setting 1Command Mode Global ConfigurationCommand Usage The management VLAN is for managing the access point. For example, the access point allows traffic that is tagged with the specified VLAN to manage the access point via remote management, SSH, SNMP, Telnet, etc.ExampleRelated Commandsvlan (6-128)vlan-id This command configures the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface. Syntaxvlan-id <vlan-id>vlan-id - Native VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)Enterprise AP(config)#vlan enableReboot system now? <y/n>: yEnterprise AP(config)#management-vlanid 3Enterprise AP(config)#
Command Line Interface6-1306Default Setting 1Command Mode Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)Command Usage • To implement the default VLAN ID setting for VAP interface, the access point must enable VLAN support using the vlan command.• When VLANs are enabled, the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface. If IEEE 802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients, specific VLAN IDs can be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. Using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients.• If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server, then the frames are tagged with the default VLAN ID of the VAP interface.ExampleWMM CommandsThe access point implements QoS using the Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) standard. Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802.11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter-operate with both WMM- enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality.The WMM commands supported by the access point are listed below. Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#vlan-id 3Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#Table 6-22. WMM CommandsCommand Function Mode Pagewmm Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point IC-W 6-131wmm-acknowledge- policy Allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled for each Access Category (AC) IC-W 6-131wmmparam  Configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access point (AP) or the wireless clients (BSS) IC-W 6-132
WMM Commands6-1316wmmThis command sets the WMM operational mode on the access point. Use the no form to disable WMM.Syntax[no] wmm <supported | required> •supported - WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this feature. Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the access point. •required - WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point. DefaultsupportedCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)Examplewmm-acknowledge-policyThis command allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled for each Access Category (AC).Syntaxwmm-acknowledge-policy <ac_number> <ack | noack>•ac_number - Access categories. (Range: 0-3) •ack - Require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. •noack - Does not require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. DefaultackCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)Command Usage • WMM defines four access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see Table 5-1). The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm requiredEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1326interpretability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients.• Although turning off the requirement for the sender to wait for an acknowledgement can increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy.ExamplewmmparamThis command configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access point (AP) or the wireless clients (BSS).Syntaxwmmparam <AP | BSS> <ac_number> <LogCwMin> <LogCwMax> <AIFS> <TxOpLimit> <admission_control>•AP - Access Point •BSS - Wireless client •ac_number -  Access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags as shown in Table 5-1. (Range: 0-3) •LogCwMin - Minimum log value of the contention window. This is the initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the LogCwMin value. Specify the LogCwMin value. Note that the LogCwMin value must be equal or less than the LogCwMax value. (Range: 1-15 microseconds) •LogCwMax - Maximum log value of the contention window. This is the maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the LogCwMax value. Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the LogCwMin value. (Range: 1-15 microseconds) •AIFS - Arbitrary InterFrame Space specifies the minimum amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt. (Range: 1-15 microseconds) •TXOPLimit - Transmission Opportunity  Limit specifies the maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data-rate traffic. (Range: 0-65535 microseconds) Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm-acknowledge-policy 0 noackEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
WMM Commands6-1336•admission_control - The admission control mode for the access category. When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category. (Options: 0 to disable, 1 to enable)DefaultCommand ModeInterface Configuration (Wireless)ExampleAP ParametersWMM Parameters AC0 (Best Effort)  AC1 (Background)  AC2 (Video)  AC3 (Voice) LogCwMin4432LogCwMax 10 10 4 3AIFS3722TXOP Limit  0 0 94 47Admission Control  Disabled Disabled Disabled DisabledBSS ParametersWMM Parameters AC0 (Best Effort)  AC1 (Background)  AC2 (Video)  AC3 (Voice) LogCwMin4432LogCwMax 6 10 4 3AIFS3711TXOP Limit  0 0 94 47Admission Control  Disabled Disabled Disabled DisabledEnterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmmparams ap 0 4 6 3 1 1Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Command Line Interface6-1346
A-1Appendix A: TroubleshootingCheck the following items before you contact local Technical Support.1. If wireless clients cannot access the network, check the following:• Be sure the access point and the wireless clients are configured with the same Service Set ID (SSID).• If authentication or encryption are enabled, ensure that the wireless clients are properly configured with the appropriate authentication or encryption keys.• If authentication is being performed through a RADIUS server, ensure that the clients are properly configured on the RADIUS server.• If authentication is being performed through IEEE 802.1X, be sure the wireless users have installed and properly configured 802.1X client software.• If MAC address filtering is enabled, be sure the client’s address is included in the local filtering database or on the RADIUS server database.• If the wireless clients are roaming between access points, make sure that all the access points and wireless devices in the Extended Service Set (ESS) are configured to the same SSID, and authentication method.2. If the access point cannot be configured using the Telnet, a web browser, or SNMP software:• Be sure to have configured the access point with a valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.• If VLANs are enabled on the access point, the management station should be configured to send tagged frames with a VLAN ID that matches the access point’s management VLAN (default VLAN 1, page 5-17). However, to manage the access point from a wireless client, the AP Management Filter should be disabled (page 5-17). • Check that you have a valid network connection to the access point and that the Ethernet port or the wireless interface that you are using has not been disabled.• If you are connecting to the access point through the wired Ethernet interface, check the network cabling between the management station and the access point. If you are connecting to access point from a wireless client, ensure that you have a valid connection to the access point.• If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted (i.e, four sessions). Try connecting again at a later time.
TroubleshootingA-2A3. If you cannot access the on-board configuration program via a serial port connection:• Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and 9600 bps. • Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out connections provided on page B-3.4. If you forgot or lost the password:• Set the access point to its default configuration by pressing the reset button on the back panel for 5 seconds or more. Then use the default user name “admin” and default password “smcadmin” to access the management interface.5. If all other recovery measure fail, and the access point is still not functioning properly, take any of these steps:• Reset the access point’s hardware using the console interface, web interface, or through a power reset.• Reset the access point to its default configuration by pressing the reset button on the back panel for 5 seconds or more. Then use the default user name “admin” and default password “smcadmin” to access the management interface.
B-1Appendix B: Cables and PinoutsTwisted-Pair Cable Assignments For 10/100BASE-TX connections, a twisted-pair cable must have two pairs of wires. Each wire pair is identified by two different colors. For example, one wire might be green and the other, green with white stripes. Also, an RJ-45 connector must be attached to both ends of the cable. Caution: Each wire pair must be attached to the RJ-45 connectors in a specific orientation. (See “Straight-Through Wiring” on page B-2 and “Crossover Wiring” on page B-3 for an explanation.)Caution: DO NOT plug a phone jack connector into the RJ-45 port. Use only twisted-pair cables with RJ-45 connectors that conform with FCC standards.The following figure illustrates how the pins on the RJ-45 connector are numbered. Be sure to hold the connectors in the same orientation when attaching the wires to the pins.10/100BASE-TX Pin AssignmentsUse unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable for RJ-45 connections: 100-ohm Category 3 or better cable for 10 Mbps connections, or 100-ohm Category 5 or better cable for 100 Mbps connections. Also be sure that the length of any twisted-pair connection does not exceed 100 meters (328 feet).The RJ-45 port on the access point is wired with MDI pinouts. This means that you must use crossover cables for connections to PCs or servers, and straight-through cable for connections to switches or hubs. However, when connecting to devices that support automatic MDI/MDI-X pinout configuration, you can use either straight-through or crossover cable.1881
Cables and PinoutsB-2BStraight-Through WiringBecause the 10/100 Mbps port on the access point uses an MDI pin configuration, you must use “straight-through” cable for network connections to hubs or switches that only have MDI-X ports. However, if the device to which you are connecting supports auto-MDIX operation, you can use either “straight-through” or “crossover” cable.Table B-1.   10/100BASE-TX MDI Port PinoutsPin MDI Signal Name1 Transmit Data plus (TD+)2 Transmit Data minus (TD-)3 Receive Data plus (RD+)4 GND (Positive Vport)5 GND (Positive Vport)6 Receive Data minus (RD-)7 -48V feeding power (Negative- Vport)8 -48V feeding power (Negative- Vport)Note: The “+” and “-” signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair.White/Orange StripeOrangeWhite/Green StripeGreen1234567812345678EIA/TIA 568B RJ-45 Wiring Standard10/100BASE-TX Straight-through CableEnd A End BBlueWhite/Blue StripeBrownWhite/Brown Stripe
Console Port Pin AssignmentsB-3BCrossover WiringBecause the 10/100 Mbps port on the access point uses an MDI pin configuration, you must use “crossover” cable for network connections to PCs, servers or other end nodes that only have MDI ports. However, if the device to which you are connecting supports auto-MDIX operation, you can use either “straight-through” or “crossover” cable.Console Port Pin AssignmentsThe DB-9 console port on the front panel of the access point is used to connect to the access point for out-of-band console configuration. The command-line configuration program can be accessed from a terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program. The pin assignments and cable wiring used to connect to the console port are provided in the following table.White/Orange StripeOrangeWhite/Green Stripe1234567812345678EIA/TIA 568B RJ-45 WiringStandard10/100BASE-TX Crossover CableEnd A End BGreenBlueWhite/Blue StripeBrownWhite/Brown Stripe1569
Cables and PinoutsB-4BWiring Map for Serial Cable Table B-2.   Wiring Map for Serial CableDB9 Male (AP Console) DB9 Male (PC DTE)Pin Function Pin Function1 Unused 1 Unused2 RXD (receive data) 3 TXD (transmit data)3 TXD (transmit data) 2 RXD (receive data)4 Unused 4 Unused5 GND (ground) 5 GND (ground)6 Unused 9 Unused7 RTS (request to send) 8 CTS (clear to send)8 CTS (clear or send) 7 RTS (request to send)9 Unused 6 UnusedNote: The left hand column pin assignments are for the male DB-9 connector on the access point. Pin 3 (TXD or “transmit data”) must emerge on the management console’s end of the connection as RXD (“receive data”). Pin 8 (CTS or “clear to send”) must emerge on the management console’s end of the connection as RTS (“request to send”)
C-1Appendix C: SpecificationsGeneral SpecificationsMaximum Channels802.11b/g:FCC/IC: 1-11ETSI: 1-13France: 10-13MKK: 1-14Taiwa n:  1- 11Maximum Clients64 per VAP interfaceOperating RangeSee “Operating Range” on page C-5Data Rate802.11g: 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54, 108Mbps per channel802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps per channelModulation Type802.11g: CCK, BPSK, QPSK, OFDM802.11b: CCK, BPSK, QPSKNetwork ConfigurationInfrastructureOperating Frequency802.11b:2.4 ~ 2.4835 GHz (US, Canada, ETSI)2.4 ~ 2.497 GHz (Japan)2.400 ~ 2.4835 GHz (Taiwan)Channels 12 and 13 will be disabled by the software in the USAAC Power AdapterInput: 100-240 AC, 50-60 HzOutput: 5.1 VDC, 3APower consumption: 13.2 wattsUnit Power SupplyDC Input: 5 VDC, 2 A maximumPoE input: -48 VDC, 0.2 A maximumPower consumption: 9.6 W maximum
SpecificationsC-2CPoE (DC)Input voltage: 48 volts, 0.2 A, 12.96 wattsNote: Power can also be provided to the access point through the Ethernet port based on IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) specifications. When both PoE is provided and the adapter is plugged in, PoE will be turned off.Physical Size21 x 12.5 x 2.6cm (8.27 x 4.92x 1.02 in)Weight0.665 kg (1.466 lbs)LED IndicatorsPWR (Power), Link (Ethernet Link/Activity), 11g (Wireless Link/Activity)Network ManagementWeb-browser, RS232 console, Telnet, SSH, SNMPTemperatureOperating: 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)Storage: 0 to 70 °C (32 to 158 °F)Humidity15% to 95% (non-condensing)CompliancesFCC Class B (US)ICES-003 (Canada)RTTED 1999/5/ECVCCI (Japan)RCR STD-33ARadio Signal CertificationFCC Part 15C 15.247, 15.207 (2.4 GHz)RSS-210 (Canada)EN 300.328, EN 301.489-1, EN 301.489-17, EN50385MPT RCR std.33 (D33 1~13 Channel, T66 Channel 14)SafetycCSAus(CSA 22.2 No. 60950-1 & UL60950-1)EN60950-1 (TÜV/GS), IEC60950-1 (CB)StandardsIEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.11b, g
SensitivityC-3CSensitivityTransmit Power IEEE 802.11gData Rate Sensitivity (dBm) 6 Mbps -889 Mbps -8712 Mbps -8617 Mbps -8524 Mbps -8136 Mbps -7748 Mbps -7254 Mbps -70IEEE 802.11bData Rate Sensitivity (dBm) 1 Mbps -932 Mbps -905.5 Mbps -9011 Mbps -87IEEE 802.11g Maximum Output Power (GHz - dBm)Data Rate 2.412 2.417~2.467  2.4726 Mbps 16 21 199 Mbps 16 21 1912 Mbps 16 21 1918 Mbps 16 21 1924 Mbps 16 21 1936 Mbps 16 21 1948 Mbps 16 21 19
SpecificationsC-4C54 Mbps 16 21 18108 Mbps N/A 22 N/AIEEE 802.11b Maximum Output Power (GHz - dBm)Data Rate 2.412 2.417~2.467  2.4721 Mbps 19 22 192 Mbps 19 22 195.5 Mbps 19 22 1911 Mbps 19 22 19IEEE 802.11g Maximum Output Power (GHz - dBm)Data Rate 2.412 2.417~2.467  2.472
Transmit PowerC-5COperating RangeImportant NoticeMaximum distances posted below are actual tested distance thresholds. However, there are many variables such as barrier composition and construction and local environmental interference that may impact your actual distances and cause you to experience distance thresholds far lower than those posted below.Notes: 1. Outdoor Environment: A line-of-sight environment with no interference or obstruction between the access point and clients.2. Indoor Environment: A typical office or home environment with floor to ceiling obstructions between the access point and clients.Table C-1  802.11g Wireless Distance TableSpeed and Distance RangesEnvironment 54 Mbps 48 Mbps 36 Mbps 24 Mbps 18 Mbps 12 Mbps 11 Mbps 9 Mbps 6 Mbps 5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 MbpsOutdoors182 m 269 ft  100 m 328 ft  300 m984 ft330 m1082 ft 350 m1148 ft450 m1475 ft470 m 1541 ft 485 m 1590 ft 495 m 1623 ft 510 m 1672 ft 520 m 1705 ft 525 m 1722 ftIndoors220 m66 ft 25 m82 ft 35 m115 ft 43 m141 ft 50 m164 ft 57 m187 ft66 m216 ft71 m233 ft80 m262 ft85 m279 ft90 m295 ft93 m305 ftTable C-2  802.11b Wireless Distance TableSpeed and Distance RangesEnvironment 11 Mbps 5.5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 MbpsOutdoors1300 m 984 ft 465 m 1525 ft 500 m 1639 ft 515 m 1689 ftIndoors260 m 197 ft 70 m 230 ft 83 m 272 ft 85 m 279 ft
SpecificationsC-6C
Glossary-1Glossary10BASE-TIEEE 802.3 specification for 10 Mbps Ethernet over two pairs of Category 3 or better UTP cable.100BASE-TXIEEE 802.3u specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over two pairs of Category 5 or better UTP cable.Access PointAn internetworking device that seamlessly connects wired and wireless networks. Access points attached to a wired network, support the creation of multiple radio cells that enable roaming throughout a facility.Ad HocA group of computers connected as an independent wireless network, without an access point.Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)An encryption algorithm that implements symmetric key cryptography. AES provides very strong encryption using a completely different ciphering algorithm to TKIP and WEP.AuthenticationThe process to verify the identity of a client requesting network access. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication: open system and shared key.Backbone The core infrastructure of a network. The portion of the network that transports information from one central location to another central location where it is unloaded onto a local system.Basic Service Set (BSS)A set of 802.11-compliant stations and an access point that operate as a fully-connected wireless network.BeaconA signal periodically transmitted from the access point that is used to identify the service set, and to maintain contact with wireless clients.
Glossary-2GlossaryBroadcast KeyBroadcast keys are sent to stations using 802.1X dynamic keying. Dynamic broadcast key rotation is often used to allow the access point to generate a random group key and periodically update all key-management capable wireless clients.CSMA/CACarrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance.Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.EncryptionData passing between the access point and clients can use encryption to protect from interception and evesdropping.Extended Service Set (ESS)More than one wireless cell can be configured with the same Service Set Identifier to allow mobile users can roam between different cells with the Extended Service Set.Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)An authentication protocol used to authenticate network clients. EAP is combined with IEEE 802.1X port authentication and a RADIUS authentication server to provide “mutual authentication” between a client, the access point, and the a RADIUS serverEthernetA popular local area data communications network, which accepts transmission from computers and terminals.File Transfer Protocol (FTP)A TCP/IP protocol used for file transfer. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)HTTP is a standard used to transmit and receive all data over the World Wide Web.IEEE 802.11bA wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2.4 GHz band using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS). The standard provides for data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps.
Glossary-3GlossaryIEEE 802.11gA wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2.4 GHz band using using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). The standard provides for data rates of 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps. IEEE 802.11g is also backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b.IEEE 802.1XPort Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication. InfrastructureAn integrated wireless and wired LAN is called an infrastructure configuration.Inter Access Point Protocol (IAPP)A protocol that specifies the wireless signaling required to ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant access points.Local Area Network (LAN)A group of interconnected computer and support devices.MAC AddressThe physical layer address used to uniquely identify network nodes. Network Time Protocol (NTP)NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio. Open SystemA security option which broadcasts a beacon signal including the access point’s configured SSID. Wireless clients can read the SSID from the beacon, and automatically reset their SSID to allow immediate connection to the nearest access point. Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (ODFM)OFDM/ allows multiple users to transmit in an allocated band by dividing the bandwidth into many narrow bandwidth carriers.Power over Ethernet (PoE)A specification for providing both power and data to low-power network devices using a single Category 5 Ethernet cable. PoE provides greater flexibility in the locating of access point’s and network devices, and significantly decreased installation costs.
Glossary-4GlossaryRADIUSA logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to the network.RoamingA wireless LAN mobile user moves around an ESS and maintains a continuous connection to the infrastructure network.RTS ThresholdTransmitters contending for the medium may not be aware of each other. RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node Problem.” If the packet size is smaller than the preset RTS Threshold size, the RTS/CTS mechanism will NOT be enabled.Service Set Identifier (SSID)An identifier that is attached to packets sent over the wireless LAN and functions as a password for joining a particular radio cell; i.e., Basic Service Set (BSS). Session KeySession keys are unique to each client, and are used to authenticate a client connection, and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point.Shared KeyA shared key can be used to authenticate each client attached to a wireless network. Shared Key authentication must be used along with the 802.11 Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services.Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)A data encryption method designed as a replacement for WEP. TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption keys. Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
Glossary-5GlossaryVirtual Access Point (VAP)Virtual AP technology multiplies the number of Access Points present within the RF footprint of a single physical access device. With Virtual AP technology, WLAN users within the device’s footprint can associate with what appears to be different access points and their associated network services. All the services are delivered using a single radio channel, enabling Virtual AP technology to optimize the use of limited WLAN radio spectrum.Virtual LAN (VLAN)A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN. Wi-Fi Protected AccessWPA employs 802.1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key management to provide an enhanced security solution for 802.11 wireless networks.Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)WEP is based on the use of security keys and the popular RC4 encryption algorithm. Wireless devices without a valid WEP key will be excluded from network traffic.WPA Pre-shared Key (PSK)PSK can be used for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre-shared password for network access.
Glossary-6Glossary
Index-1Numerics802.11g 6-95AAES 5-75antennas, positioning 2-2authentication 5-12, 6-114cipher suite 5-78, 6-115closed system 6-105configuring 5-12, 6-114MAC address 5-13, 6-70, 6-71type 5-64, 6-105web redirect 5-14, 6-20BBasic Service Set  See BSSbeaconinterval 5-51, 6-101rate 5-51, 6-102BOOTP 6-89, 6-90BPDU 5-24BSS 3-3Ccableassignments B-1crossover B-3straight-through B-2CCK 1-1channel 6-97channels, maximum C-1Clear To Send  See CTSCLI 6-1command modes 6-4clients, maximum C-1closed system 5-54, 6-105command line interface  See CLIcommunity name, configuring 6-41community string 5-38, 6-41configuration settings, saving or restoring 5-30, 6-56configuration, initial setup 4-1console port 1-4connecting 2-2pin assignments B-3required settings 4-1country codeconfiguring 4-3, 6-12crossover cable B-3CSMA/CA 1-1CTS 5-52, 6-103Ddata ratemaximum distances C-5data rate, options C-1default settings 1-6device status, displaying 5-83, 6-23DHCP 5-5, 6-89, 6-90distances, maximum C-5DNS 5-6, 6-89Domain Name Server  See  DNSdownloading software 5-29, 6-56DSSS 1-1DTIM 5-51, 6-102Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  See DHCPEEAP 5-74encryption 5-64, 5-69, 5-74Ethernetcable 2-2port 1-4event logs 5-89, 6-32Extensible Authentication Protocol  See EAPFfactory defaultsrestoring 5-30, 6-10Index
IndexIndex-2filter 5-17, 6-70address 5-12, 6-70between wireless clients 5-17, 6-73local bridge 5-17, 6-73local or remote 5-12, 6-72management access 5-17, 6-74protocol types 6-75VLANs 5-54, 6-128firmwaredisplaying version 5-30, 6-24upgrading 5-29, 5-30, 6-56fragmentation 6-102Ggateway address 4-2, 5-6, 6-2, 6-89Hhardware version, displaying 6-24HTTP, secure server 6-19HTTPS 6-19IIAPP 6-127IEEE 802.11a 1-1, 5-48, 6-95configuring interface 6-95maximum data rate 6-96radio channel 6-97IEEE 802.11b 5-48IEEE 802.11f 6-127IEEE 802.11g 5-48configuring interface 5-48, 6-95maximum data rate 6-96radio channel 5-49, 6-97IEEE 802.1x 5-74, 6-65, 6-70configuring 5-80, 6-65infrastructurewireless bridge 3-5wireless repeater 3-6initial setup 4-1installationhardware 2-1mounting 2-1IP addressBOOTP/DHCP 6-89, 6-90configuring 4-2, 5-5, 6-89, 6-90LLED indicators 1-3lock, Kensington 2-1logmessages 5-33, 5-89, 6-29server 5-32, 6-29loginCLI 6-1web 4-3logon authenticationRADIUS client 5-14, 6-59MMAC address, authentication 5-13, 6-70, 6-71maximum associated clients 5-51maximum data rate 6-96802.11a interface 6-96802.11g interface 6-96maximum distances C-5mounting the access point 2-1Nnetwork topologiesinfrastructure 3-3infrastructure for roaming 3-4OOFDM 1-1open system 5-64, 6-105operating frequency C-1Ppackage checklist 1-2passwordconfiguring 5-28, 6-15management 5-28, 6-15pin assignmentsconsole port B-3DB-9 port B-3PoE 1-4specifications C-1port prioritySTA 6-86power connection 2-2
IndexIndex-3Power over Ethernet See  PoEpower supply, specifications C-1PSK 5-75Rradio channel802.11a interface 6-97802.11g interface 5-49, 6-97RADIUS 5-7, 5-74, 6-59RADIUS, logon authentication 5-14, 6-59Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service  See  RADIUSRequest to Send  See RTSreset 5-30, 6-10reset button 1-5, 5-30resetting the access point 5-30, 6-10restarting the system 5-30, 6-10RJ-45 portconfiguring duplex mode 6-91configuring speed 6-91RTSthreshold 5-52, 6-103SSecure Socket Layer See SSLsecurity, options 5-64session key 5-80, 5-81, 6-67shared key 5-70, 6-117Simple Network Time Protocol  See  SNTPSNMP 5-37, 6-40community name 6-41community string 6-41enabling traps 5-38, 6-42trap destination 5-38, 6-43trap manager 5-38, 6-43SNTP 5-34, 6-34enabling client 5-34, 6-34server 5-34, 6-34softwaredisplaying version 5-29, 5-83, 6-24downloading 5-30, 6-56specifications C-1SSHserver Status 5-11SSID 5-69, 6-105SSL 6-19STAinterface settings 6-86–??path cost 6-86port priority 6-86startup files, setting 6-55station status 5-86, 6-109statusdisplaying device status 5-83, 6-23displaying station status 5-86, 6-109straight-through cable B-2system clock, setting 5-34, 6-35system logenabling 5-32, 6-29server 5-32, 6-29system software, downloading from server 5-29, 6-56TTelnetfor managenet access 6-1Temporal Key Integrity Protocol  See TKIPtime zone 5-35, 6-36TKIP 5-74transmit power, configuring 5-51, 6-97trap destination 5-38, 6-43trap manager 5-38, 6-43troubleshooting A-1Uupgrading software 5-29, 6-56user name, manager 5-28, 6-15user password 5-28, 6-15VVLANconfiguration 5-54, 6-128native ID 5-54
IndexIndex-4WWEP 5-69configuring 5-69shared key 5-70, 6-117Wi-Fi Multimedia  See WMMWi-Fi Protected Access  See WPAWired Equivalent Protection  See WEPWPA 5-74pre-shared key 5-78, 6-121WPA, pre-shared key  See PSK
Model Number: SMC2552W-G2Pub. Number: 149100034100EE082006-DT-R02
38 TeslaIrvine, CA 92618Phone: (949) 679-8000TECHNICAL SUPPORTFrom U.S.A. and Canada (24 hours a day, 7 days a week)(800) SMC-4-YOUPhn: (949) 679-8000Fax: (949) 679-1481ENGLISHTechnical Support information available at www.smc.comFRENCHInformations Support Technique sur www.smc.comDEUTSCHTechnischer Support und weitere Information unter www.smc.comSPANISHEn www.smc.com Ud. podrá encontrar la información relativa a servicios desoporte técnicoDUTCHTechnische ondersteuningsinformatie beschikbaar op www.smc.comPORTUGUESInformações sobre Suporte Técnico em www.smc.comSWEDISHInformation om Teknisk Support finns tillgängligt på www.smc.comINTERNETE-mail address: techsupport@smc.comDRIVER UPDATEShttp://www.smc.com/index.cfm?action=tech_support_drivers_downloadsWORLD WIDE WEBhttp://www.smc.com/Model Number: SMC2552W-G2

Navigation menu